Tektronix Marine Radio CSA 803C User Manual

Service Manual

CSA 803C

Communications Signal Analyzer

070-9974-01

Warning

The servicing instructions are for use by qualified

personnel only. To avoid personal injury, do not

perform any servicing unless you are qualified to

do so. Refer to all safety summaries prior to

performing service.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARRANTY

Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the

date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the

defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product.

In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty

period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging and

shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid. Tektronix shall

pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service

center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for

products returned to any other locations.

This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance

and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by

personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage resulting from

improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; or c) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with

other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.

THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER

WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX' RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR

REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR

BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,

INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS

ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EC Declaration of Conformity

Tektronix Holland N.V.

Marktweg 73A

8444 AB Heerenveen

The Netherlands

declare under sole responsibility that the

CSA 803C Communications Signal Analyzer

meets the intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low

Voltage Directive 73/23/ECC for Product Safety. Compliance was demonstrated to the

following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Communities:

EMC Directive 89/336/EEC:

EN 55011

Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions

EN 50082-1 Immunity:

IEC 801-2

IEC 801-3

IEC 801-4

IEC 801-5

Electrostatic Discharge Immunity

RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity

Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity

Power Line Surge Immunity

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC:

EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for

measurement, control, and laboratory use

Tektronix, Inc. claims compliance to the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC for the following

products when they are used with the above named product:

SD-20

SD-22

SD-24

SD-26

SD-30

SD-32

SD-42

SD-46

SD-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Declaration of Conformity

with Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards

as Required under the Radiocommunications Act

Tektronix, Inc.

Tektronix Australia Pty Limited

80 Waterloo Road

North Ryde NSW 2113

Supplier Code: N60

declare under sole responsibility that the

CSA 803C Communications Signal Analyzer

to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standards:

AS/NZS 2064.1/2 Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment: 1992

Tektronix, Inc. claims conformity to the standards for the following products when they

are used with the above named product:

SD-20

SD-22

SD-24

SD-26

SD-30

SD-32

SD-42

SD-46

SD-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contacting Tektronix

Product

Support

For applicationĆoriented questions about a Tektronix measurement

product, call toll free in North America:

1Ć800ĆTEKĆWIDE (1Ć800Ć835Ć9433 ext. 2400)

6:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. Pacific time

Or, contact us by eĆmail:

tm_app_supp@tek.com

For product support outside of North America, contact your local

Tektronix distributor or sales office.

Service

Support

Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office. Or, visit our web

site for a listing of worldwide service locations.

http://www.tek.com

For other

information

In North America:

1Ć800ĆTEKĆWIDE (1Ć800Ć835Ć9433)

An operator will direct your call.

To write us

Tektronix, Inc.

P.O. Box 1000

Wilsonville, OR 97070Ć1000

CSA 803C Service Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contacting TekTronix

Contacting Tektronix

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Contacting Tektronix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvii

xix

Specifications

Operating Information

Sampling HeadInstallation andRemoval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power CordInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Memory Backup Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ventilation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Packaging for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2Ć2

2Ć4

2Ć5

2Ć6

2Ć7

Theory of Operation

System Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3Ć3

Acquisition System Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Strobe Distribution Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time Base/Controller Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trigger Select Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Executive Processor Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Memory Management Unit Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Waveform Memory Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/O Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Waveform Compressor andDisplay Control Block . . . . . . . . .

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Typical Waveform Processing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3Ć3

3Ć4

3Ć5

3Ć6

CSA 803C Service Manual

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Block Diagram Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3Ć7

A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board3Ć.7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Address Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Function Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Internal Clock Rate Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A3 M/F Power Connect Board3.Ć.8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A4 Regulator Board3.Ć8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VoltageĆFault Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A5 Time Base/Controller Board3Ć.9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RAM/ROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Acquisition System Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Memory Management Unit (MMU) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A7 CRT Socket Board3.Ć1. 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Red, Green, and Blue Video Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Red, Green, and Blue Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Convergence Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A8 CRT Driver Board3.Ć1. .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horizontal Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vertical Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

High Voltage and Grid Voltage Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Degauss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Beam Current Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Grid Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A9, A10, andA11 Front Panel Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Touch Panel, Major Menu Keys, and Menu Status LEDs . . . .

A9 Touch Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A10 Front Panel Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A11 Front Panel Button Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A12 Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPIB Data and Address Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard RSĆ232ĆC Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A13 Mother Board3Ć.1.8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A14 Input/Output (I/O) Board3Ć.1.8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/O Data Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/O Delayed Data Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Timer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Serial Data Interface (SDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tone Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Temp/Tone Readback Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3Ć7

3Ć8

3Ć9

3Ć11

3Ć12

3Ć13

3Ć14

3Ć15

3Ć16

3Ć17

3Ć18

3Ć19

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

A15 Memory Management Unit (MMU) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3Ć20

3Ć21

3Ć22

3Ć23

3Ć24

3Ć25

3Ć26

3Ć27

3Ć28

3Ć29

3Ć30

MMUIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Waveform RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time Base/Controller Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Executive Processor (EXP) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bit Map RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Waveform Display RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Video DigitalĆtoĆAnalog Converter (DAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A17 Executive Processor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Executive Processor (EXP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Numeric Coprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bus Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wait State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interrupt Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DMA Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A18 Memory Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Address Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Address Decode and Memory Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EPROMs, SRAM, and NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Memory Data Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wait State Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wait State Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Memory Configuration Readback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Strobe Sense Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Strobe Deskew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TDR Buffer and Level Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A20/A21 Head Interconnect (Power Only) Boards . . . . . . . . . .

A22/A23 Head Interconnect Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A27 & A28 Acquisition System Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programmable Gain Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A/D Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Measurement Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Timing and Sampling Head Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shared RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time Base/Controller Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSA 803C Service Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Performance Verification

Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using These Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conventions in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu Selections and Measurement Techniques . . . . . . . . . . .

User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4Ć3

4Ć6

4Ć11

Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4Ć13

PowerĆOn Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Invoke PowerĆOn Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Invoke PowerĆOn Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SelfĆTest Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PowerĆOn Diagnostics Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sampling Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Calibrate a Sampling Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Calibrate a Sampling Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Extended Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Invoke Extended Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Invoke Extended Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vertical Reference Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Check Vertical Reference Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Check Vertical Reference Voltage . . . . . . . . . . .

Horizontal Reference Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Check Horizontal Reference Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Check Horizontal Reference Clock . . . . . . . . . .

Vertical Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Check Vertical Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Check Vertical Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Check Offset Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Check Offset Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Vertical RMS Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Examine Vertical RMS Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Examine Vertical RMS Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sweep Rate Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Examine Sweep Rate Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Examine Sweep Rate Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sweep Rate Accuracy 2 ns/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sweep Rate Accuracy 1 ns/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sweep Rate Accuracy 100 ps/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sweep Rate Accuracy 10 ps/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sweep Rate Accuracy 1 ps/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4Ć14

4Ć15

4Ć16

4Ć17

4Ć19

4Ć21

4Ć23

4Ć25

4Ć28

4Ć31

4Ć34

4Ć35

4Ć36

4Ć37

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Triggering, External Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4Ć39

4Ć41

4Ć43

4Ć45

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Check Prescaler Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Check Prescaler Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prescaler Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Check Prescaler Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Check Prescaler Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Internal Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Measurement Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Examine Internal Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Examine Internal Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrator Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Measurement Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Examine Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Examine Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjustment

Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UsingThese Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conventions in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu Selections and Measurement Techniques . . . . . . . . . . .

User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Measurement Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Examine Voltage Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Examine Voltage Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Examine/Adjust Voltage Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Examine/Adjust Voltage Reference . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Examine/Adjust Regulator Reference . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Examine/Adjust Regulator Reference . . . . . . . .

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Measurement Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Examine/Adjust the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Examine/Adjust the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Measurement Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup to Examine/Adjust Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure to Examine/Adjust Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . .

5Ć3

5Ć6

5Ć7

5Ć9

5Ć11

5Ć13

5Ć14

5Ć20

CSA 803C Service Manual

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Maintenance

Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć1

Removing the Cabinet Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Periodic Electrical Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć1

6Ć2

6Ć3

Corrective Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć5

Power Supply Voltage Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ordering Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

StaticĆSensitive Device Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing and Replacing FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć5

6Ć6

6Ć8

Electrical LockĆOn of the Front Panel ON/STANDBY

Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć13

6Ć16

6Ć19

6Ć20

6Ć26

6Ć27

6Ć28

6Ć29

6Ć31

6Ć32

6Ć33

6Ć35

6Ć37

6Ć40

6Ć42

6Ć44

6Ć45

6Ć47

6Ć49

6Ć51

6Ć53

6Ć55

6Ć57

Power Supply Module Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fan Motor Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .

Acquisition Unit Removal/ Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery Disposal and First Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency and First Aid Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FRU Board and Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A3 M/F Power Connect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A4 Regulator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A5 Time Base/Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A7 CRT Socket Board and A8 CRT Driver Board . . . . . . . . . .

A9 Touch Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A10 Front Panel Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A11 Front Panel Button Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A12 Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A13 Mother Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A14 Input/Output (I/O) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A15 Memory Management Unit (MMU) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A17 Executive Processor (EXP) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A18 Memory Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A20/A21 Head Interconnect (Power Only) and

A22/A23 Head lnterconnect Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć59

6Ć62

6Ć64

6Ć65

A26 M/F Acquisition lnterconnect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A27 Acquisition Analog Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A28 Acquisition MPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

viii

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

FRU IC Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć66

6Ć69

6Ć75

6Ć77

Serial Data Interface Integrated Circuits (SlamĆPack" ICs) . .

Firmware Integrated Circuits (Dual InĆLine Package" ICs) . .

Firmware Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interconnecting Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CoaxialĆType EndĆLead Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MultiĆPin Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checks After FRU Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diagnostic Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć79

Diagnostics Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Kernel Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SelfĆTest/Extended Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Extended Diagnostics Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Extended Diagnostics Error Index Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diagnostic Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diagnostic Menu Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diagnostic Terminal Mode (RSĆ232ĆC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Mode (GPIB & RSĆ232ĆC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Clearing NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FRU Name Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Component and Module Name Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Executive Subsystem Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display Subsystem Error Index Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time Base Processor Error Index Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Acquisition Processor Error Index Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć79

6Ć80

6Ć81

6Ć84

6Ć85

6Ć86

6Ć87

6Ć89

6Ć90

6Ć91

6Ć92

6Ć93

6Ć97

6Ć98

6Ć100

Other Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć101

Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A4 Regulator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CRT, A7 CRT Socket Board, or A8 CRT Driver Board . . . . . . .

Module Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A13 Mother Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuse Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time Base Calibration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Acquisition Calibration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć101

6Ć102

6Ć103

6Ć106

6Ć108

CSA 803C Service Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Options

Instrument Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Cord Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7Ć1

7Ć2

Electrical PartsList

Diagrams

PartsList

Replaceable Parts1.0.Ć1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PartsOrdering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Firmware Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Replaceable Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Item Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indentation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10Ć1

10Ć2

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

List of Figures

Figure 2Ć1:ăSampling Head Compartments in the

CSA 803C Communications Signal Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2Ć2

2Ć5

Figure 2Ć2:ăPowerĆCord Plug Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3Ć1:ăTrigger Edge Slew Rate for High Frequency Selection . .

3Ć10

Figure 4Ć1:ăA26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect Board Test Point

Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4Ć22

4Ć24

Figure 4Ć2:ăA5 Time Base/Controller Board Test Point Locations . . .

Figure 5Ć1:ăA18 Memory Board Test Point Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5Ć8

Figure 5Ć2:ăA2A2 Control Rectifier Board Test Point and

Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5Ć10

Figure 5Ć3:ăA4 Regulator Board Test Point and Adjustment

Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5Ć12

5Ć18

5Ć19

5Ć22

Figure 5Ć4:ăA8 CRTDriver Board Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 5Ć5:ăA7 CRTSocket Board Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 5Ć6:ăA14 I/O Board Test Point and Adjustment Locations . . . .

Figure 6Ć1:ăField Replaceable Units (FRU) Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć14

Figure 6Ć2:ăRemoving the Power Supply Module, Fan Housing,

and Rear Panel Connector Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć16

6Ć17

6Ć23

6Ć24

6Ć25

6Ć30

6Ć31

6Ć34

Figure 6Ć3:ăA2A2 Control Rectifier Board Connector Locations . . . . .

Figure 6Ć4:ăRemoving/Replacing the CRTCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć5:ăRemoving/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć6:ăRemoving/Replacing the CRTTorx Head Screws . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć7:ăTop View of the Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć8:ăRemoving/Replacing the A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board . . .

Figure 6Ć9:ăRemoving/Replacing the A4 Regulator Board . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć10:ăRemoving/Replacing the A5 Time Base/Controller

Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć36

6Ć38

6Ć39

6Ć41

Figure 6Ć11:ăRemoving/Replacing the A7 CRTSocket Board . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć12:ăRemoving/Replacing the A8 CRTDriver Board . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć13:ăA9 Touch Panel Assembly Torx Head Screws. . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć14:ăRemoving/Replacing the A9 Touch Panel Assembly . . .

Figure 6Ć15:ăRemoving/Replacing the A10 Front Panel

Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć43

Figure 6Ć16:ăRemoving/Replacing the A11 Front Panel

Button Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć44

6Ć46

6Ć48

6Ć50

6Ć52

Figure 6Ć17:ăRemoving/Replacing the A12 Rear Panel Assembly . . .

Figure 6Ć18:ăRemoving/Replacing the A13 Mother Board . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć19:ăRemoving/Replacing the A14 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć20:ăRemoving/Replacing the A15 MMU Board . . . . . . . . . . .

CSA 803C Service Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

List of Figures

Figure 6Ć21:ăRemoving/Replacing the A17 Executive Processor

Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć54

6Ć56

Figure 6Ć22:ăRemoving/Replacing the A18 Memory Board . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć23:ăRemoving/Replacing the A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer

Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć58

Figure 6Ć24:ăRemoving/Replacing the A20/A21 Head Interconnect

(Power Only) and the A22/A23 Head Interconnect Boards . . . . . .

6Ć60

6Ć61

Figure 6Ć25:ăRemoving/Replacing the Front Subpanel Assembly . . .

Figure 6Ć26:ăRemoving/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć62

6Ć63

Figure 6Ć27:ăTop View of the A26 Mainframe Acquisition

Interconnect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć28:ăRemoving/Replacing the A27 Acquisition

Analog Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć64

6Ć65

6Ć68

6Ć71

Figure 6Ć29:ăRemoving/Replacing the A28 Acquisition MPUBoard .

Figure 6Ć30:ăFRUIC Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć31:ăIC InsertionĆExtraction Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć32:ăMultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć74

6Ć94

Figure 6Ć33:ăA17 Executive Processor Board Test Point and

Status LED Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć34:ăA15 MMUBoard Test Point and Status

LED Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć98

6Ć99

Figure 6Ć35:ăA5 Time Base/Controller Board Status LEDs . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6Ć36:ăA28 Acquisition MPUBoard Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć100

Figure 6Ć37:ăA14 I/O Board Fuse Locator Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć105

Figure 7Ć1:ăPowerĆCord Plug Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7Ć2

Figure 9Ć1:ăCSA 803C System Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . .

Figure 9Ć2:ăA1 M/F Strobe Drive Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 9Ć3:ăA4 Regulator Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 9Ć4:ăA5 Time Base/Controller Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . .

Figure 9Ć5:ăA7 CRT Socket Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 9Ć6:ăA8 CRT Driver Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 9Ć7:ăA12 Rear Panel Assembly Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 9Ć8:ăA14 I/O Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 9Ć9:ăA15 MMUBoard Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 9Ć10:ăA17 Executive Processor Board Block Diagram . . . . . . .

Figure 9Ć11:ăA18 Memory Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 9Ć12:ăA19 Strobe/TDR Buffer Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . .

9Ć1

9Ć2

9Ć3

9Ć4

9Ć5

Figure 9Ć13:ăA26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect Board Block

Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9Ć5

9Ć6

Figure 9Ć14:ăA27 Acquisition Analog Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . .

Figure 9Ć15:ăA28 Acquisition MPUBoard Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . .

xii

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

List of Figures

Figure 10Ć1:ăCabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10Ć7

10Ć9

Figure 10Ć2:ăFront Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 10Ć3:ăChassis, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 10Ć4:ăCircuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10Ć11

10Ć13

Figure 10Ć5:ăAcquisitionModule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Ć16

Figure 10Ć6:ăPower Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 10Ć7:ăAccessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10Ć18

10Ć20

CSA 803C Service Manual

xiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

List of Figures

xiv

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

List of Tables

TableĂ1Ć1:ăMeasurement Limits, Specifications, Adjustments,

and Functional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1Ć1

2Ć5

TableĂ2Ć1:ăPowerĆCord Conductor Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ4Ć1:ăMeasurement Limits, Specifications, and Functional

Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4Ć1

4Ć3

TableĂ4Ć2:ăTest Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ4Ć3:ăVoltage Source Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ4Ć4:ăVertical Offset Test Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ4Ć5:ăSensitivity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ4Ć6:ăPrescaler Test Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4Ć27

4Ć30

4Ć33

4Ć42

TableĂ5Ć1:ăMeasurement Limits and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ5Ć2:ăTest Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5Ć2

5Ć3

TableĂ6Ć1:ăRelative Susceptibility to Damage from Static Discharge .

TableĂ6Ć2:ăFRU Removal/Replacement Figure Cross Reference . . . .

TableĂ6Ć3:ăEmergency Procedures for Contact with Battery Solvent .

TableĂ6Ć4:ăChecks Required After FRU Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć5:ăExtended Diagnostics Error Index Code Descriptions . . .

TableĂ6Ć6:ăSystem Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć7:ăEvent Code Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć8:ăBoard FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć9:ăComponent Module FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć10:ăExecutive Processor Kernel Error Index Codes . . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć11:ăExecutive Processor Status LED Configuration . . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć12:ăExecutive Processor Manual Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć13:ăDisplay Processor Kernel Error Index Codes . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć14:ăDisplay Processor Status LED Configuration . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć15:ăTime Base Processor Kernel Error Index Codes . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć16:ăAcquisition Processor Kernel Error Index Codes . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć17:ăA14 I/O Board Fuse Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ6Ć18:ăTime Base Calibration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Ć6

6Ć8

6Ć28

6Ć77

6Ć82

6Ć87

6Ć91

6Ć92

6Ć93

6Ć94

6Ć95

6Ć97

6Ć98

6Ć100

6Ć104

6Ć107

TableĂ7Ć1:ăPowerĆCord Conductor Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TableĂ10Ć1:ăBoard FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7Ć2

10Ć3

CSA 803C Service Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

List of Tables

xvi

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Safety Summary

Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to

this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this

product only as specified.

Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.

While using this product, you may need to access other parts of the system. Read

the General Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions

related to operating the system.

To Avoid Fire or

Personal Injury

Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and

certified for the country of use.

Use Proper Voltage Setting. Before applying power, ensure that the line selector is

in the proper position for the power source being used.

Connect and Disconnect Properly. Do not connect or disconnect probes or test

leads while they are connected to a voltage source.

Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor

of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be

connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output

terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.

Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings

and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings

information before making connections to the product.

Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels

removed.

Use Proper Fuse. Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product.

Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components

when power is present.

Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this

product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.

Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions.

Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.

Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry.

Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manual’s installation instructions for

details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation.

CSA 803C Service Manual

xvii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Summary

Symbols and Terms

Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual:

WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result

in injury or loss of life.

CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in

damage to this product or other property.

Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product:

DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the

marking.

WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the

marking.

CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.

Symbols on the Product. The following symbols may appear on the product:

WARNING

High VoltĆ

age

Protective

Ground (Earth)

Terminal

CAUTION

Refer toManual

Double

Insulated

xviii

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Service Safety Summary

Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. Read this Service

Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service

procedures.

Do Not Service Alone. Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this

product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is

present.

Disconnect Power. To avoid electric shock, disconnect the mains power by means

of the power cord or, if provided, the power switch.

Use Caution When Servicing the CRT. To avoid electric shock or injury, use

extreme caution when handling the CRT. Only qualified personnel familiar with

CRT servicing procedures and precautions should remove or install the CRT.

CRTs retain hazardous voltages for long periods of time after power is turned off.

Before attempting any servicing, discharge the CRT by shorting the anode to

chassis ground. When discharging the CRT, connect the discharge path to ground

and then the anode. Rough handling may cause the CRT to implode. Do not nick

or scratch the glass or subject it to undue pressure when removing or installing it.

When handling the CRT, wear safety goggles and heavy gloves for protection.

Use Care When Servicing With Power On. Dangerous voltages or currents may

exist in this product. Disconnect power, remove battery (if applicable), and

disconnect test leads before removing protective panels, soldering, or replacing

components.

To avoid electric shock, do not touch exposed connections.

X-Radiation. To avoid x-radiation exposure, do not modify or otherwise alter the

high-voltage circuitry or the CRT enclosure. X-ray emissions generated within

this product have been sufficiently shielded.

CSA 803C Service Manual

xix

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Summary

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

This section provides specifications for testing and adjusting your CSA

803C. Refer to the CSA 803C User Manual for a general description of the

characteristic, environmental, and user specifications of the CSA 803C.

Table 1Ć1 lists measurement and specification values. Refer to the PerforĆ

mance Verification section for Performance test procedures; refer to the

Adjustments section for Adjustment procedures.

TableĂ1Ć1:ăMeasurement Limits, Specifications, Adjustments, and Functional Tests

Partand Description

Measurement

Limits (Examine)

Specifications

(Check)

Adjustments

(Adjust)

Functional

Tests

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Sampling Head

none

yes

Extended Diagnostics

Power Supply

Voltage Supply

+4.85 V to

+5.25 V

none

Voltage Reference

+5.15 V to

+5.25 V

R800 +5.2 V Ref

for +5.20 V

Regulator Reference

+9.95 V to

+10.05 V

R730 +10 V Ref

for +10.00 V

Display

Cutoff

visible

none

SCREEN, on

transformer on A8

CRT Driver board,

until display

appears

Convergence

primary colors are not

separated in the white

grid

CONVERGENCE, no

R210, for

optimum

convergence of

red, green, and

blue

Focus

focused grid pattern

none

FOCUS, on

transformer on A8

CRT Driver board,

for optimum focus

on white grid

pattern

CSA 803C Service Manual

1Ć1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

TableĂ1Ć1:ăMeasurement Limits, Specifications, Adjustments, and Functional Tests (Cont.)

Partand Description

Measurement

Limits (Examine)

Specifications

(Check)

Adjustments

(Adjust)

Functional

Tests

Display (Cont.)

Vertical Size and

Position

align with tic marks

none

VERT SIZE, L321; no

and VERT POS,

R311; for

optimum

alignment

Horizontal Size,

Linearity and

Position

align with tic marks and none

for optimum

appearance

HĆSIZE, R501;

HĆLIN, R502; and

HĆPOS, R500, for

optimum

alignment and

linearity

Gray Scale

white at the top of the

display and gray at the

bottom, and the right

side of the display is

cut off

none

SCREEN, on

transformer on A8

CRT Driver board;

RED, R200;

GREEN, R201;

and BLUE, R203;

for cutoff and

color balance

Color Impurity

no severe color

impurities in red, green,

and blue display

none

cycle power on

and off

Real Time Clock

1,000,000 ms ±5 ms

Real Time Clock

for 1,000,000 ms

Vertical Reference Voltage

none

+5 V ±200 mV

and

-5 V ±200 mV

none

Horizontal Reference Clock

none

200,000 kHz

±5 kHz

none

Vertical Accuracy

Vertical Gain

none

±1.0% full scale

±2 mV

none

yes

Offset Accuracy

Vertical Linearity

System Vertical RMS Noise

±1%

200 mV at 2 mV/div

500 mV at 5 mV/div

1 mV at 10 mV/div

none

yes

632 mV at 20 mV/div

1.58 mV at 500 mV/div

3.16 mV at 100 mV/div

6.32 mV at 200 mV/div

1Ć2

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

TableĂ1Ć1:ăMeasurement Limits, Specifications, Adjustments, and Functional Tests (Cont.)

Part and Description

Measurement

Limits (Examine)

Specifications

(Check)

Adjustments

(Adjust)

Functional

Tests

Sweep Rate Accuracy

0.05% at 2 ns/div

0.08% at 1 ns/div

0.8% at 100 ps/div

2.5% at 10 ps/div

10% at 1 ps/div

none

yes

Triggering, External Direct

300 MHz Sensitivity

yes

100 mV at 300 MHz

pĆp

100 mV stable

display

none

1000 MHz Sensitivity

3.0 GHz Sensitivity

Prescaler Triggering

ą ą

100 mV at 1000 MHz 100 mV stable

pĆp

display

100 mV at 3.0 GHz

pĆp

100 mV stable

display

800 mV at 2 GHz

pĆp

800 mV stable

display

yes

600 mV at 3 GHz

pĆp

600 mV stable

display

ą ą

600 mV at 10 GHz

pĆp

600 mV stable

display

Internal Clock

Rise Time

yes

≤2.5 ns

none

Frequency

100 kHz ±3%

50% ±3%

100 kHz ±3%

50% ±3%

Duty Cycle

Calibrator Output

Rise Time (typical)

PeakĆtoĆpeak Amplitude

250 ps

none

250 mV ±10%

CSA 803C Service Manual

1Ć3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

1Ć4

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operating Information

The CSA 803C Communications Signal Analyzer Service Manual is designed

for use by qualified service personnel. It contains information necessary to

check, troubleshoot, and maintain the CSA 803C Communications Signal

Analyzer.

Troubleshooting is primarily based upon internal powerĆon diagnostics.

These diagnostics isolate problems to the field replaceable unit (FRU) level.

Defective FRUs not detected by diagnostics are isolated using other means.

Once the faulty FRU is identified, use the instructions provided in this manuĆ

al to remove and replace it. The removal and immediate replacement of the

faulty FRU allows a minimum of downtime for the user. The Parts List section

gives a complete list of the FRUs in this instrument.

FirstĆtime users are encouraged to read the CSA 803C Communications

Signal Analyzer User Manual. This will help you learn the basic functions of

the CSA 803C.

This section contains information about installing and removing a sampling

head, applying power, proper environmental conditions, and shipping the

instrument.

CSA 803C Service Manual

2Ć1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operating Information

To avoid damage to the CSA 803C, set the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDĆ

BY before installing or removing sampling heads.

Sampling Head

Installation and

Removal

CAUTION

Applying a voltage outside the range printed on the sampling head

can result in damage. Static electricity is also a hazard.

The input diodes used in the sampling heads are very susceptible to damĆ

age from overdrive signals or DC voltages and from electrostatic discharge.

Never apply a voltage outside the range printed on the front of the sampling

head. Operate the CSA 803C only in a staticĆcontrolled environment.

Connect the wrist strap provided with the CSA 803C to the ANTISTATIC

CONNECTION, as showninFigure 2Ć1. Refer to the CSA 803C CommunicaĆ

tions Signal Analyzer User Manual for more information.

The SDĆSeries sampling head slides into one of the front panel compartĆ

ments of the CSA 803C Communications Signal Analyzer. Figure 2Ć1 shows

the front panel of the CSA 803C Communications Signal Analyzer and the

locations of the sampling head compartments.

PowerĆOnly

Sampling Head

Compartments

Acquisition

Sampling Head

Compartments

CSA 803C

Antistatic

Connection

Figure 2Ć1:ăSampling Head Compartments in the

CSA 803C Communications Signal Analyzer

2Ć2

Operating Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operating Information

With the ON/STANDBY switch set to STANDBY, place the sampling head in a

compartment and slowly push it in with firm pressure. Once the sampling

head is seated, turn the lockĆdown screw to tighten the sampling head in

place.

CAUTION

Never install or remove a sampling head when the ON/STANDBY

switch is ON.

To remove the sampling head, set the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY.

Turn the lockĆdown screw to loosen the sampling head, and then slowly pull

out the sampling head.

CSA 803C Service Manual

2Ć3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operating Information

The rear panel LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR allows you to select either a

115 V or 230 V (48 Hz to 440 Hz) nominal supply source. The 6 A, 250 V line

fuse is used for both 115 V and 230 V operation.

Power Information

WARNING

GROUNDING. For electric shock protection, make the grounding

connection before makingany connection to the instrument's input

or output terminals. This instrument is safety Class 1 equipment

(IEC designation). All accessible conductive parts are directly

connected through the grounding conductor of the power cord to

the grounded (earth) contact of the power plug.

Any interruption of the grounding connection can create an electriĆ

cal shock hazard. The power input plugmust be inserted only in a

matingreceptacle with a groundingcontact where earth ground

has been verified by a qualified service person. Do not defeat the

grounding connection.

WARNING

AC POWER SOURCE AND CONNECTION. An improper voltage

supply can damage the instrument. The instrument operates from a

singleĆphase power source. It has a threeĆwire power cord and

twoĆpole, threeĆterminal grounding type plug. The voltage to

ground (earth) from either pole of the power source must not

exceed the maximum rated operatingvoltage, 250 V.

Before makingconnection to the power source, check that the LINE

VOLTAGE SELECTOR is set to match the voltage of the power

source and has a suitable twoĆpole, threeĆterminal groundingĆtype

plug.

2Ć4

Operating Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operating Information

A power cord with appropriate plug configuration is supplied with each

Power Cord

Information

instrument. Table 2Ć1, PowerĆCord Conductor Identification, gives the colorĆ

coding of the conductors in the power cord. If you require a power cord

other than the one supplied, refer to Figure 2Ć2, PowerĆCord Plug IdentificaĆ

tion.

TableĂ2Ć1:ăPowerĆCord Conductor Identification

Conductor

Color

Alternate Color

Black

Ungrounded (Line)

Grounded (Neutral)

Grounded (Earth)

Brown

Light Blue

Green/Yellow

White

Green

Standard*

North American

115V

Option A1

Universal Euro

230V

Option A2

Option A3

Australian

230V

Option A4*

North American

230V

Option A5

Switzerland

230V

Option 1A*

Option 1B

North American

3ĆPhase

North American

115V/High Power

* Canadian Standards Association certification

includes these power plugs for use in the

North American power network

Figure 2Ć2:ăPowerĆCord Plug Identification

CSA 803C Service Manual

2Ć5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operating Information

There are four batteries within the instrument that allow the retention of

volatile memory upon loss of the AC power source. These selfĆcontained

power sources provide memory backup power to retain the following:

MemoryBackup

Power

frontĆpanel settings

stored settings

stored waveforms

Time & Date parameters

some of the Time Base Cal Constants (these are regenerated automatiĆ

cally if lost)

the number of hours of instrument onĆtime, number of powerĆon seĆ

quences, and instrument serial number

The batteries have a nominal shelf life of approximately five years.

The following environmental requirements are provided so that you can

ensure proper functioning and extend the operation of the instrument.

Operating

Environment

Operating Temperature

The instrument can be operated where the ambient air temperature is beĆ

tween 0_ C and +50_ C and can be stored in ambient temperatures from

-40_ C to +75_ C. After storage at temperatures outside the operating

limits, allow the chassis to reach the safe operating temperature before

applying power.

Ventilation Requirements

The fan draws air through the side panels of the instrument and blows air

out through the rear to cool the instrument. To ensure that this cooling

process occurs properly, allow at least two inches clearance on both sides

and the rear of the instrument. The top and bottom of the instrument do not

require ventilation clearance.

CAUTION

If air flow is restricted, then the instrument's power supply may

temporarily shut down.

2Ć6

Operating Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operating Information

If the instrument is to be shipped for long distances by commercial transĆ

portation, it should be packaged in the original manner. The carton and

packaging materialin which your instrument was shipped shoudl be saved

and used for this purpose.

Packaging for

Shipment

Also, if the instrument is to be shipped to a Tektronix service center for

service or repair, attach a tag to the instrument showing the following:

owner of the instrument (with address)

name of person to contact at your firm

complete instrument type and serial number

if possible, furnish complete system firmware versions as displayed in

the Instrument Options popĆup menu selected from the UTILITY major

H a description of the service required

If the original packaging is unfit for use or not available, package the instruĆ

ment as follows:

ăStep 1:ăObtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with a

375Ćpound test strength and having inside dimensions at least six inĆ

ches greater than the instrument dimensions. This allows for cushioning.

ăStep 2:ăWrap the instrument with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent

materialto protect the finish.

ăStep 3:ăCushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing dunnage

or urethane foam between the carton and the instrument, allowing three

inches on each side.

ăStep 4:ăSealthe carton with shipping tape or with an industrialstapel r.

ăStep 5:ăMark the address of your local Tektronix service center and your

return address on the carton in one or more prominent locations.

CSA 803C Service Manual

2Ć7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operating Information

2Ć8

Operating Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Theory of Operation

The Tektronix CSA 803C is a highĆresolution Communications Signal AnalyzĆ

er accommodating up to four input channels through the dualĆchannel

sampling heads. With the SDĆ24 TDR/Sampling Head, four channels of

singleĆended TDR or two channels of differential TDR are available as well.

Features include:

sweep rates ranging from 5 ms/division to 1 ps/div

autoset to provide a suitably adjusted display for viewing and further

manual adjustment

windows for viewing expanded sections of a trace

selfĆtests to assure continuous accuracy of waveform data and measureĆ

ments

digital waveform storage and display

onĆboard measurement capabilities

menuĆdriven touchĆscreen operation

RSĆ232ĆC, GPIB, and PRINTER interfaces

This section has two main sub sections:

System Functional Overview describes the major functional blocks of

the CSA 803C and presents a typical waveform processing cycle

Block Diagram Descriptions discusses the individual boards in the

CSA 803C

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Theory of Operation

3Ć2

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Functional Overview

This section describes the major functional blocks of the CSA 803A (see

Figure 9Ć1).

The CSA 803C contains an Acquisition system, which supports two dualĆ

channel sampling heads and contains two data acquisition and measureĆ

ment channels. Additionally, two powerĆonly slots are provided.

Acquisition System

Block

Since the Acquisition system supports four input channels (two dualĆchannel

heads) and contains only two measurement channels, the four input chanĆ

nels are multiplexed into the two measurement channels through an analog

multiplexer. Either one of the sampling head input channels can be indepenĆ

dently connected to either of these two measurement channels.

Several calibration signals are also supplied to eachmultiplexer, although

these signals are used only for selfĆtests and diagnostics.

The Strobe Distribution block acts as an interface between the Time Base/

Controller and the Acquisition systems.

Strobe Distribution

Block

The Time Base/Controller generates a strobe pulse that is regenerated by

the Strobe Distribution block to drive all the sampling heads in parallel.

The Time Base/Controller block is comprised of the following circuits:

Time Base/Controller

Block

a microprocessor withlocal RAM and ROM

the time base and trigger circuits

interfaces to the memory management unit (MMU) and Acquisition

systems

The Trigger Select block selects the desired trigger signal to be sent to the

Time Base/Controller block.

Trigger Select Block

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Functional Overview

After the user requests an operation (with a front panel control for instance),

the Executive Processor (EXP) directs the CSA 803C to perform this operaĆ

tion. Another primary function of the EXP is to execute diagnostic SelfĆTests

on the instrument when poweringĆon or at the user's request. To control

operations, the EXP controls andmonitors the other circuit boards sharing

the executive system bus. Through the executive bus boards, the EXP also

indirectly controls all other instrument boards. The EXP generates comĆ

mands andstatus signals to control onĆboarddevices andI/O devices, such

as GPIB andRSĆ232ĆC interfaces, that help process data andhelp control

the rest of the instrument.

Executive Processor

Block

The memory management unit (MMU) arbitrates requests for access to the

Waveform Memory from the following three sources:

MemoryManagement

Unit Block

the EXP

the Time Base/Controller

the display system

This arbitration allows all three systems transparent access to the Waveform

Memory.

Waveform Memory is sharedamong the following processors:

Waveform Memory

Block

the EXP

the Display

the Time Base/Controller

While the main function of the Waveform Memory is the storage of waveform

data andwaveform relatedinformation, the sharedmemory is also usedto

pass messages between the Executive, Display, andTime Base/Controller

processors. Eventually, all acquiredwaveforms are transferredfrom the

Acquisition system memory to the Waveform Memory for display.

3Ć4

Theoryof Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Functional Overview

User control of the CSA 803C is primarily through the following three front

panel controls:

Front Panel Controls

the frontĆpanel majorĆmenu buttons

the touch panel

the multifunction knobs

The major menu buttons are the top level menu selections for the instruĆ

ment. Touching an icon, menu item, or waveform selects that particular icon,

menu item, or waveform, respectively. The multifunction knobs control the

function of the particular item that is selected.

The I/O block provides a GPIB port, RSĆ232ĆC port, and a PRINTER port for

interfacing various I/O devices to the instrument.

I/O Block

The display subsystem provides all visual output to the user. This includes

not only data output such as waveform traces, graticules, axes, and annotaĆ

tion, but displays supporting the human interface as well (which includes

menus, labeling for touch panel input, and an interactive output to assist in

operating the system; that is, the current modeĆsetting information).

Waveform

Compressor and

Display Control Block

The CSA 803C uses a custom vertical rasterĆscan display that provides

excellent resolution for both waveform display and text. The display system

produces the display by the following:

1. transferring waveform data from the Waveform Memory

2. compressing it into 512 horizontal pixels

3. converting it to a format compatible with the vertical rasterĆscan display

The Waveform Compressor takes waveforms with more than 512 data points

and compresses these points into 512 groups. For example, for a 1024Ćpoint

waveform, each group would contain two points; for 2048Ćpoint waveforms,

each group would contain four points. The Waveform Compressor finds the

largest and smallest vertical value in a group of points and then draws a

vector between the maximum and minimum Ċ even in dots" mode. The

only difference between dots and vectors is that in vector mode the vectors

are extended vertically to meet the vector on the next scan line.

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Functional Overview

The CSA 803C operates from either a 115 V or 230 V nominal line voltage

source at a line frequency between 48 Hz and 440 Hz. The LINE VOLTAGE

Power Supply

SELECTOR switch allows selection of AC line inputs of 90 V

or 180 V

to 132 V

RMS

to 250 V

RMS

Apply power to the instrument as follows:

1. Turn the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER switch to ON

2. Turn the front panel ON/STANDBY switch to ON

A small green indicator lamp should light indicating the power is on.

The following is a brief overview of how the CSA 803C acquires, processes,

and displays a waveform from the input channels:

Typical Waveform

Processing Cycle

1. Analog input signals are connected to the sampling head inputs.

2. The Time Base/Controller block produces precisely timed strobe signals

based on the trigger signal.

3. These strobe signals are distributed to the sampling head channels and

instruct the sampling heads when to take samples of the input signal.

4. The Acquisition systems take the output of the sampling heads, amplify

or attenuate the signals, and apply any offset based on the vertical size

and position controls.

5. The output of the amplifiers are applied to analogĆtoĆdigital (A/D) conĆ

verters, which convert the sampled voltages to digital codes and then

store these codes in the acquisition system memory.

6. Once all the samples in a waveform have been acquired, the Time

Base/Controller then transfers these samples from the Acquisition sysĆ

tem memory to the Waveform Memory, through the waveform data

direct memory access (DMA).

7. The EXP processes information from the human interfaces (that is, the

menus, icons, buttons, and knobs that you interact with to control the

oscilloscope).

8. The EXP sends commands to the display system so that the function

that you selected is displayed.

9. When instructed by the EXP, the display system receives the waveform

data from waveform memory and converts it to a unique vertical rasterĆ

scan format for a display based on your settings.

3Ć6

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

This section describes the CSA 803C detailed block (cabling) diagram and

the boardĆlevel block diagrams (see the Diagrams section).

The A1 M/F Strobe Drive board consists of the following circuits:

A1 M/F Strobe Drive

Board

Data buffers circuitry

Address latch circuitry

Function decoder circuitry

Internal clock rate generator circuitry

Control buffers circuitry

See Figure 9Ć2 for a block diagram of this board.

Data Buffers

This circuit buffers the A5 Time Base/Controller board's address and data

buses with bidirectional buffers, and the A5 Time Base/Controller board's

control lines with octal buffers.

Address Latch

This circuit buffers and latches the address for the A5 Time Base/Controller

board to use.

Function Decoder

This circuit partially decodes this latched address and enables the data

buffers if the address is on this board or the A27 & A28 Acquisition system

boards (controlled through this board). The function decoder also selects

the appropriate direction of the data buffers to perform a read or write operaĆ

tion.

Internal Clock Rate Generator

This circuit is a 16Ćbit programmable counter that is tied to the ÷ 2 flipĆflop

that produces the square wave output. The overall division ratio of this block

can be programmed from 2 to 2 . The internal clock rate generator is

programmed at powerĆon to provide a 100 kHz output given a 4 MHz input

on jumper J35.

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

Control Buffer

This circuit buffers the control signals sent to the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board

from the A5 Time Base/Controller board.

The A3 M/F Power Connector board consists of builtĆin connectors that

distribute the power supply voltages from the A4 Regulator board to the

following boards:

A3 M/F Power

ConnectBoard

A1 M/F Strobe Drive board

A5 Time Base/Controller board

A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board

The A3 M/F Power Connect board also supplies ±15 Vpower to the A14

Input/Output (I/O) board through a 16Ćpin ribbon cable.

The regulators convert semiĆregulated voltages into stabilized lowĆripple

output voltages. The A4 Regulator board consists of the following regulators

and the voltageĆfault detect circuitry:

A4 Regulator Board

+50 V

-15 V

+5 V

+15 V

-50 V

See Figure 9Ć3 for a block diagram of this board.

The operational amplifiers used for the +50 V, +15 V, +5 V, -50 V, -15 V

and -5 Vregulators require that the following special voltages be generated

for their operation:

semiĆregulated +54 Vsupply generates the +20 Vsupply

semiĆregulated -54 Vsupply generates the -20 Vsupply

semiĆregulated +54 Vsupply generates the +10 Vsupply

semiĆregulated -54 Vsupply generates the -10 Vsupply

+10.0 VREF is used as a reference voltage

VoltageĆFault Detect

This circuit consists of two window comparators and associated resistors.

The circuitry detects if any regulated supply is overĆvoltage or underĆvoltage.

The associated resistors set a hysteresis window that is 5% of the regulator

sense line voltages.

3Ć8

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

The A5 Time Base Controller board consists of the following circuitry:

A5 Time

Base/Controller

Board

Microprocessor (MPU)

RAM/ROM

Trigger circuitry

Time Base circuitry

Acquisition system interface

Memory management unit (MMU) interface

See Figure 9Ć4 for the block diagram of this board.

Microprocessor

The microprocessor controls the time base and trigger circuitry in response

to commands from the Executive Processor, performs local onĆline calibraĆ

tion of the time base, schedules waveform acquisitions, and manages the

Acquisition system and waveform data transfers.

RAM/ROM Memory

Both RAM and ROM memory reside within the microprocessor's 1 Mbyte of

address space. The upper 256 Kbytes is reserved as ROM, the lower

128 Kbytes of static RAM is provided for dynamic data storage and local

nonĆvolatile memory. There are 32 Kbytes of memoryĆprovided communicaĆ

tion and waveform storage for the CSA 803C's 8 channels, and another

32 Kbytes for the Strobe Distribution block of the oscilloscope and multiplexĆ

ers. There are 512 Kbytes of memory assigned as communication and

primary waveform storage. Another 32 Kbytes are used to map the commuĆ

nication buffer of the parallel interface with the memory management unit,

and the remaining 32 Kbytes are divided into I/O space and time base

control.

Trigger

This circuitry Is comprised of the trigger recognizer and gated voltage conĆ

trol oscillator. The trigger circuits accept trigger signals from either the Direct

or Prescaler Inputs. The strobe sense signal and internal feedback signals

are used in the SelfĆTests diagnostic process but are not normally used for

data acquisition.

The trigger recognizer sees a valid direct or prescale trigger signal and

outputs this signal to the voltage controlled oscillator that sets the timing for

the strobe signal.

The direct trigger input allows programmed slope and level selection, but

the prescale trigger input is not adjustable.

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

Ifauto trigger mode is selected, the timebase will generate its own trigger

signal after 20 ms. If normal trigger mode is selected, the CSA 803C will wait

for trigger signals.

The High Frequency On/OfControl selects the state ofthe trigger hysteresis

in the direct trigger path.

High Frequency On removes trigger hysteresis and improves sensitivity

when the trigger signal edge slew rate is 1 V/ns or greater, typically a

320 mV , 1 GHz sine wave. See Figure 3Ć1.

pĆp

High Frequency Off retains trigger hysteresis while improving noise rejection

at low frequencies, when the trigger edge slew rate is less than 1 V/ns. It

can be used at any frequency if the trigger signal amplitude reliably triggers

the CSA 803C. See Figure 3Ć1. This is the default setting after initialization.

960 mV

>1 V/ns

640 mV

320 mV

in pĆp

HF On

<1 V/ns

HF Off

1 GHz

2 GHz

3 GHz

4 GHz

Frequency

Figure 3Ć1:ăTrigger Edge Slew Rate for High Frequency Selection

The Enhanced Triggering ON/OfControl selects the state ofthe metastable

trigger rejection feature in the direct trigger path.

Enhanced Triggering On directs the timebase to detect metastable trigger

events and reject the acquired data. The data is reacquired at the next

trigger event.

Enhanced Triggering Off allows the timebase to acquire and display metastĆ

able trigger events.

The Trigger Holdoff Control in the trigger menu programs the trigger holdoff

value.

Auto Holdoff is the default mode. This mode automatically programs Actual

Holdoff to the minimum possible value. It depends only on the time base

settings and is updated when the Main Size and Main Position values

3Ć10

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

change. Triggering is held off to beyond the rightmost point in the Main

record. The minimum value is 5 ms. The Actual Holdoff (auto mode) calculaĆ

tion is:

Actual Holdoff (auto mode) = max (5 ms, 5 ms+Main Pos+Duration)

where Duration = Main Size ꢀ 10 divisions.

Manual Holdoff extends the trigger holdoff to longer periods, up to 2.5 seĆ

conds. The Actual Holdoff value depends on the value of Requested Holdoff

in addition to the time base settings. The Actual Holdoff (manual mode)

calculation is:

Actual Holdoff (manual mode) = max (5 ms, 5 ms+Main Pos+Duration,

Requested Holdoff)

Time Base

This circuit is a very precise slewing delay generator. It accepts triggers from

the reference oscillator, generates a precise delay, and outputs a strobeĆ

drive pulse.

The time base circuitry consists of a TECL integrated circuit (IC), which

contains three sixĆbit highĆspeed counters, and a CMOS IC, which contains

a 48Ćbit programmable strobe delay generator.

On the first sample of the waveform, the sample is taken immediately after a

starting delay. Subsequent samples are delayed by a small additional

amount, called the dot delay. The dot delay is programmed and stored into

the strobe delay register. Each sample is delayed by one delay more than

the previous sample. The dot delay can vary from 10 fs to 20 ns depending

on the horizontal size and the number of points in the waveform record.

The sampling interval (incremental delay between samples) is the total

acquisition time (time/division ꢀ 10 divisions) divided by the number of

points acquired.

Acquisition System Interface

This circuit contains 16 Kbytes of RAM (physically located on the A28 AcĆ

quisition MPUboard) that is shared between the Acquisition system and the

Time Base/Controller. This RAM is mapped into the microprocessor memory

space so that it can be accessed as any other RAM Ċ either by the microĆ

processor itself or the DMA controller.

This shared memory allows the microprocessor to transfer waveforms from

the Acquisition system to the Waveform Memory using DMA. It also provides

a mailbox structure for commands and data passed between the two sysĆ

tems.

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

Memory Management Unit (MMU) Interface

This circuit interfaces the Time Base/ Controller to the EXP and the WaveĆ

form Memory. This interface allows the EXP to send commands to the microĆ

processor through the Time Base/Controller and provides the path for

waveform transfers from the Acquisition system to the Waveform Memory.

The A7 CRT Socket board is an interface from the A15 MMU board to the

CRT. The A7 CRT Socket board consists of the following circuits:

A7 CRT Socket Board

Red, Green, and Blue video amplifiers

RED, GREEN, and BLUE cutoff adjustments

CONVERGENCE adjustment

See Figure 9Ć5 for a block diagram of this board.

Red, Green, and Blue VideoAmplifiers

These three circuits are identical high speed video amplifiers that drive the

three cathodes (R, G, and B; red, green, and blue, respectively) of the CRT.

Each of the three colors can be programmed to display 64 different levels.

This yields a possible 262,144 colors, of which eight can be displayed on

the screen at any time.

Red, Green, and Blue Adjustments

These three potentiometers control the cutoff point; that is, the point at

which a certain color becomes invisible.

Convergence Adjustment

This potentiometer controls the vertical convergence of the red, green, and

blue deflection beams.

3Ć12

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

The A8 CRT Driver board consists of the following circuits:

A8 CRT Driver Board

Horizontal sweep circuitry

Vertical sweep circuitry

High voltage and grid voltage generator circuitry

Degauss circuit

Beam current limit circuit

Grid bias circuit

The A8 CRT Driver board circuitry drives the raster scan CRT. The VIDEO

and SYNC signals from the A15 MMU board generate the ZĆaxis signal,

sweep signals, and grid bias voltages for the CRT.

See Figure 9Ć6 for a block diagram of this board.

Horizontal Sweep

This circuit generates the sweep current for the horizontal deflection yoke.

The horizontal driver includes an oscillator, a voltage ramp generator, a

highĆgain amplifier, and a flyback generator. These components provide

sweep synchronization, horizontal deflection, and linearity.

The horizontal adjustments, HĆSIZE, HĆPOS, and HĆLIN, allow you to optiĆ

mize the appearance of the display.

Vertical Sweep

This circuit produces a deflection current that sweeps the video beam from

the bottom to the top of the CRT. This circuit also produces a flyback signal

to the flyback transformer that is in parallel with the deflection yoke.

The vertical adjustments, VERT SIZE and VERT POS, set the vertical size

and position of the display.

High Voltage and Grid Voltage Generator

This circuit includes the flyback transformer that generates the 16 kV CRT

anode potential and other bias voltages. This transformer is coupled and

synchronized with the vertical deflection system.

The SCREEN adjustment provides the cutoff point; that is, the point where

no information is visible on the display screen. The FOCUS adjustment

provides manual focusing of the display image.

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

Degauss

This circuit removes magnetic fields from the color steel aperture grille.

These magnetic fields are induced at each powerĆon by magnetic sources.

The Degauss circuit produces an exponentially decaying sine wave with a

frequency of approximately 3.7 kHz. This waveform is applied to the deĆ

gauss coils that are located on both sides of the CRT. The decayed oscillaĆ

tion through the coils causes a magnetic field to be induced in the CRT steel

aperture grille. This magnetic field saturates the steel and then forces the

stored magnetic field down to zero as the steel is driven around its hystereĆ

sis curve.

Beam Current Limit

This circuit limits the average power to the CRT to less than 15 W. An ampliĆ

fier circuit compares the sum of the anode current and the FOCUS adjustĆ

ment current to a reference current of 0.72 mA. If the sum of the two

currents exceeds the reference current, then the three video amplifiers on

the A7 CRT Socket board are disabled.

Grid Bias

This circuit provides -40 V of grid bias to the A7 CRT Socket board. At

powerĆoff, the grid is supplied with -90 V until the focus circuit discharges a

high voltage. This prevents a bright spot from appearing at the center of the

screen at powerĆoff.

The A9, A10, and A11 FrontĆPanel Circuit boards specifically consist of the

following boards:

A9, A10, and A11

Front Panel Boards

A9 Touch Panel assembly

A10 Front Panel Control board

A11 Front Panel Button board

Touch Panel, Major Menu Keys, and Menu Status LEDs

These three functions interface to the Executive processor through a general

purpose programmable keyboard and display controller IC on the A10 Front

Panel Controller board.

The keyboard function of the IC handles the touch matrix and hard keys.

The display function drives the menu LED light bars.

3Ć14

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

A9 Touch Panel Assembly

This circuit Is comprised of infrared LEDs that produce a matrix of light

beams that are interrupted when the user touches a particular touch zone.

The touch panel and hard key matrix are scanned continuously until a

shadow or keypress is detected. When a hit is detected, that scan is comĆ

pleted and the interrupt line is asserted by the display controller. During this

time, the interrupt is active and no new data is written into the sensor RAM

from the touch panel or hard keys, even though the hardware continues to

scan; therefore, the data will not change in the sensor RAM while the microĆ

processor is reading it.

Only one infrared LED is turned on at a time and only the phototransistor

directly opposite is selected to receive light. This prevents any crosstalk

between emitter/detector pairs.

A10 FrontPanel Control Board

This circuitry generates the 6Ćbit address bus that is used to select an inĆ

frared LED and its compliment phototransistor on the A9 Touch Panel board.

A11 Front Panel Button Board

This circuitry Is comprised of the major menu LED light bars that are driven

by the display refresh register output of the A7 Display Controller board.

Internally, there is a matrix of display RAM organized in an 8Ćbit by 8Ćbit

matrix. This display RAM is scanned column by column (automatically),

lighting the appropriate LED bar(s) when a high bit is encountered. The

coarse/fine LEDs are driven by a latch that is controlled by the EXP. The

coarse/fine selections are sensed on the A9 Touch Panel board.

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

The A12 Rear Panel assembly links the oscilloscope to other devices. This

assembly contains connectors for the following ports:

A12 Rear Panel

Assembly

One GPIB Port

One RSĆ232ĆC Port

One Printer Port (Centronics style)

The A12 Rear Panel assembly is controlled from the A14 Input/Output (I/O)

board through a 40Ćwire cable. This cable contains the following signals:

EightĆbit bidirectional data bus

FourĆbit address bus

Four interrupt lines

GPIB DMA request and grant lines

Four device control lines

Assorted power supply and ground lines

See Figure 9Ć7 for a block diagram of this assembly.

GPIB Data and Address Bus

This bus drives the GPIB controller directly. Control signals DBIN and WR

are used by the GPIB controller to determine if the microprocessor is trying

to read from it or write to it. The interrupt controllers in the A17 Executive

Processor board monitor this interrupt line and will signal the microprocesĆ

sor to service the GPIB controller. In order to communicate with the microĆ

processor, the GPIB controller requires that at least one of the following

conditions occurs:

the receiver section of the GPIB controller has a byte of data (Inbyte

the transmitter section register (Outbyte Register) is empty and is ready

to receive another byte of data

the status of the GPIB bus or the GPIB controller has changed and the

microprocessor has to be notified

On the opposite side of the GPIB controller is another bus system. This

other bus system includes an 8Ćbit data bus which accesses a bidirectional

GPIB data buffer and an eightĆbit control bus which accesses a GPIB control

driver. The GPIB bus is connected to the opposite side of the buffer and

control driver. These two devices are specially designed to be TTL signalĆlevĆ

el compatible on the bus side of the buffer driver.

The states of three control signals from the GPIB controller, SRQ, NRFD, and

NDAC, are monitored and displayed on the rear panel of the CSA 803C.

These LEDs show the state that the GPIB controller is in, not the state of the

GPIB bus.

3Ć16

Theoryof Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

Two other signals of interest are GPIB RQ and GPIB GR. These signals are

used by the DMA Controller on the A17 Executive Processor board to comĆ

municate with the GPIB controller. The DMA can be programmed by the

microprocessor to service either the Inbyte register or the Outbyte register.

Standard RSĆ232ĆC Controller

This communications controller Is connected to the same data bus and

address bus as the GPIB controller. The RPD7ĆRPD0 address lines transfer

data to and from the microprocessor. The RPA1ĆRPA4 address lines are

used by the microprocessor to select individual registers in the GPIB controlĆ

ler. The STD RS SEL line goes low when the microprocessor wants to comĆ

municate with the RSĆ232ĆC controller. (This line also drives the Chip

Enable.)

The RD and WR signals are driven by the microprocessor to signal if the

GPIB controller is to be read from or written into. The controller sets the STD

RS INTR (interrupt) line low to request service from the microprocessor. The

microprocessor writes a byte into the controller's transmit buffer to transmit

data on the RSĆ232ĆC bus. The microprocessor reads a byte from the receivĆ

er buffer to receive data from the RSĆ232ĆC bus. The microprocessor can

also read the status of the controller. The RSĆ232ĆC controller translates the

parallel data from the microprocessor to serial data from RXD on the

RSĆ232ĆC bus to parallel data for the microprocessor.

There are transmit and receive buffers that are compatible with the

RSĆ232ĆC bus. Clear To Send (CTS) and Data Set Ready (DSR) are

RSĆ232ĆC control signals that can be controlled by the microprocessor.

Request To Send (RTS) and Data Terminal Ready (DTR) are signals that can

be read by the microprocessor. The received signal detect (RSD) control

signal is always high when power is on. This RSĆ232ĆC port is a DCE type.

Printer Port

The CentronicsĆstyle printer port, J111, is controlled by a programmable

peripheral interface IC. This IC has all the control lines necessary to connect

to a microprocessor, plus two general purpose eightĆbit ports and the conĆ

trol signals to use them. The A12 Rear Panel Assembly Data bus and AdĆ

dress bus connect to the IC and have the same function as described for

the GPIB and RSĆ232ĆC controllers. The Printer Sel line is set low by the

microprocessor when it is communicating with the interface. The RD and

WR lines allow the microprocessor to either read or write to the registers in

the programmable peripheral interface IC. This IC must be initialized by the

microprocessor for Port A to be astrobed input port. Port C provides the

control signals.

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

The A13 Mother board provides the interconnection for the microprocessor

signals and the +5 V power among the following boards:

A13 Mother Board

A14 I/O board

A15 Memory Management Unit (MMU) board

A17 Executive Processor board

A18 Memory board

The A14 I/O board contains the following circuitry:

A14 Input/Output

(I/O) Board

Data buffers

Timer configuration circuitry

Real time clock

Serial data interface (SDI)

Temp/tone readback buffer

Tone generator

GPIB control circuitry

See Figure 9Ć8 for a block diagram of this board.

The A14 I/O board is an interface between the Executive Processor (EXP)

and devices on the A9, A10, and A11 Front Panel boards, the A12 Rear

Panel assembly, and onĆboard I/O devices. The EXP reads and writes to

these I/O devices at specific I/O addresses. These I/O addresses are deĆ

coded to produce device select signals which enable the addressed device.

Each I/O device is located on I/O address boundaries of at least 100

hex

The lower eight bits of the Executive data bus transmit data to and from the

various I/O devices. Note that only one I/O device can be accessed at a

time.

I/O Data Buffer

This circuit buffers the lower eight bits of the Executive data bus from P105.

The output of the I/O data bus drives data to the following six onĆboard

devices:

I/O delayed data buffer

Rear panel data buffer

Front panel data buffer

Tone generator

Tone/temp readback buffer

Timer configuration circuitry

3Ć18

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

I/O Delayed Data Buffer

This circuit is the interface between the I/O data bus and the Write Delayed

data bus.

Timer Configuration

This circuitry is composed of a latch and three twoĆinput data multiplexers

built with discrete gates. When a byte of data on the I/O data bus is latched,

some of the data bits individually configure counters 1 and 2, allowing the

timer to accept different inputs for different system tasks. The operating

system uses counter 0 as a realĆtime clock based on the 2 MHz CLK input

from the clock generator that is always operating at 8 MHz.

Real Time Clock

This clock and its oscillator circuit maintain the current time of day. The EXP

sets the real time clock and also interrupts the Executive processor (EXP)

every one second to request the EXP to read the time.

Serial Data Interface (SDI)

This is a custom IC that interfaces the EXP to both front panel knobs. The

EXP controls this IC, and this IC interrupts the EXP when a device requires

service.

Tone Generator

This circuitry utilizes a DAC and a timer. The timer is equipped with a special

current switch and capacitor to set the timer's frequency. The timer outputs

a square wave whose frequency is inversely proportional to the digital value

written to the temp/tone DAC. Thus, if a zero value is input to the DAC, the

tone generator produces the highest tone.

Temp/Tone Readback Buffer

This circuit is an eightĆline buffer connected to the I/O data bus. The EXP

uses this buffer to monitor the tone generator.

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

The A15 MMU board consists of the following circuits:

A15 Memory

Management Unit

(MMU) Board

MMU IC

Waveform RAM

Display interface

Time Base/Controller interface

Executive processor (EXP) interface

Display IC

Microprocessor

Bit map RAM

Waveform display RAM circuitry

Video DAC

The A15 MMU board coordinates communications among the following

three CSA 803C subsystems:

Display

Time Base/Controller

Executive

See Figure 9Ć9 for a block diagram of this board.

MMU IC

This circuit controls all data transfers to and from waveform RAM. The MMU

gate array controls highĆspeed transfers of waveform data and communicaĆ

tion messages between waveform RAM and the three subsystem interfaces:

the Display, Time Base/Controller and Executive processors. A set of handĆ

shaking lines designed to the DMA facilities of each particular subsystem

coordinates each subsystem interface.

Waveform RAM

This circuit consists of 512 Kbytes of RAM. The RAM holds waveform data

and messages that are read and written by the Time Base/Controller, DisĆ

play, and Executive subsystems.

Display Interface

Data is transferred to and from the Display subsystem and to and from the

MMU IC through this interface. The data is buffered with the bidirectional

display data buffers.

3Ć20

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

Time Base/Controller Interface

Data is transferred to and from the Time Base/Controller subsystem and to

and from the MMU IC through this interface.

Executive Processor (EXP) Interface

This circuitry consists of bidirectional buffers, address mapping programĆ

mable array logic (PAL), and interface timing control PALs. This circuitry

directs data flow to the EXP from the MMU IC and vice versa.

Display IC

This component consists of the following functional circuits:

CRTcontroller

Video output circuitry

Compressor circuit

The basic function of the CRT Controller is to produce VIDEO and SYNC

signals that indicate to the CRTwhere to position video information. The

controller is virtually automatic in operation and invisible to the firmware

programmer with the exception of several internal registers that must be

initialized at powerĆon.

The video output circuitry is where the hardware recognizes and displays

specific data structures; the rasterĆscan CRTdisplays the contents of the bit

map.

During the refresh of the screen, the hardware acquires bit map data along

with waveform display data to yield a final color index.

The compressor circuit receives a waveform composed of several possible

number of data points and outputs 512 pairs (one minimum and one maxiĆ

mum) to the display.

Microprocessor

This component transforms the entire Display subsystem into an intelligent

peripheral dedicated to operating the display. The firmware that controls the

Display subsystem executes from ROM in the microprocessor's address

space. The clock for this microprocessor operates at a frequency of 8 MHz.

Bit Map RAM

This circuit consists of 256 Kbytes of RAM, divided into 4Ćbit planes of

65,536 bytes each. Three of the bit planes are for text and the remaining bit

plane is for XY, variable persistence, and infinite persistence. Each bit in a

plane represents a single pixel of the display. Setting the representative pixel

bit in each of the planes controls the color or intensity.

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

Waveform Display RAM

This memory circuitry consists of 65,536 bytes. These bytes contain the

minimum/maximum pairs of values, along with color index and overrange/

underrange information.

Video DigitalĆtoĆAnalog Converter (DAC)

This circuit converts the digital data from the Display IC into analog data for

the A7 CRT Socket board.

The A17 Executive Processor board consists of the:

A17 Executive

Processor Board

Executive processor (EXP)

Numeric coprocessor circuitry

Bus buffer circuitry

Preset circuitry

Wait state circuitry

Interrupt controllers

DMA Controller

See Figure 9Ć10 for a block diagram of this board.

Executive Processor (EXP)

This microprocessor executes firmware routines stored in EPROMS that are

located on the A18 Memory board to control the operation of the CSA 803C.

Along with the numeric coprocessor, the EXP does all data processing not

directly related to generating the display or digitizing the waveform. When

power is first applied to the CSA 803C, the EXP executes local and system

diagnostic tests, which are located in the EPROMs on the A18 Memory

board.

The EXP performs the following functions with three main circuits:

the clock generator generates the timing signals and synchronized reset

signals for the microprocessor

the microprocessor reads and writes data, generates addresses for I/O

and memory devices, and generates status signals for the bus controller

the bus controller interprets the microprocessor's status signals and

generates the necessary bus control signals for the Executive bus

Address decoders, address latches, and data buffers are all support circuits

for I/O operations.

3Ć22

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

Numeric Coprocessor

This coprocessor is a highĆspeed, floatingĆpoint processor that executes

instructions in parallel with the EXP. The EXP programs and controls the

numeric coprocessor as an I/O device at addresses 0F8

to 0FF

hex

Bus Controller

This circuit consists of a data buffer, an address buffer, and a control buffer

that provide command and control signals from the microprocessor to the

three Executive busses. The Executive busses consist of the following:

The system data bus Ċ is a bidirectional bus. It allows the microproĆ

cessor to fetch instructions from memory, and also to write data to

memory and read data from memory. The memory that the microprocesĆ

sor uses is located on the A18 Memory board.

The system address bus Ċ carries the address of a device when the

microprocessor is requesting access to that device. Once the microproĆ

cessor has access, the addressed device can then respond to the

microprocessor.

The system control bus Ċ carries control signals sent by the microproĆ

cessor. These control signals are sent to the devices that the microproĆ

cessor addresses, so that the devices can respond at the proper

moment in the bus cycle.

Reset

This circuit generates synchronized ready and reset control signals.

Wait State

This circuit extends the bus cycle with wait states so that slower devices

have sufficient time to read or write data.

Interrupt Controllers

These circuits constantly monitor the EXP's interrupt lines to ensure that the

highest priority interrupt gets serviced first. The Interrupt controllers provide

the ability to assign priority levels to all the system's interrupt lines and,

conversely, to ignore (mask) any of the interrupt lines as well.

DMA Controller

This circuit shortens the GPIB transfer time as well as the transmission time

of waveforms through the GPIB.

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

The A18 Memory Board provides the Executive processor (EXP) with system

RAM (SRAM), NonĆvolatile RAM (NVRAM), and EPROM for most operations.

Support circuitry for the memories and diagnostic circuitry for troubleshootĆ

ing are located onĆboard. All accesses to SRAM, NVRAM, or EPROMs are

initiated by the A17 Executive Processor board (specifically by the EXP or

the DMA controller). Refer to the discussion of the A17 Executive Processor

board, earlier in this section, for bus cycle timing information.

A18 Memory Board

The A18 Memory board consists of the following circuitry:

Address latches

Address decode and memory select circuitry

EPROM and system RAM

Memory data buffers

Wait state generator

Wait state diagnostics

Memory configuration readback

NonĆvolatile RAM and battery backup

See Figure 9Ć11 for a block diagram of this board.

Address Latches

This circuitry buffers and holds the address lines for the EPROMs, SRAMs,

NVRAMs, and other onĆboard devices until the end of the bus cycle.

Address Decode and Memory Select

This circuit consists of a programmable array logic (PAL) device that deĆ

codes the address lines to produce five RAM select signals (DCS4Ć8) and

four EPROM select signals (DCS0Ć3). DCS8 enables the SRAM while

DCS4Ć7 enable the NVRAM. All EPROM and RAM select lines are latched,

and the latch outputs are normally enabled. While the latch enable signal is

high, the latch outputs are responsive to changes on the inputs; while the

latch enable signal is low, the select lines are latched.

The EXP on the A17 Executive Processor board generates the address line

inputs, A14ĆA19. Depending upon the position of a jumper on the A17

Executive Processor board, address lines A20ĆA23 can be memory bankĆseĆ

lect lines or microprocessor address lines.

The memory select circuitry provides latched memory select lines and an

enable signal for the memory data buffers.

3Ć24

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

EPROMs, SRAM, and NVRAM

The memory includes EPROMs, System RAM (SRAM), and NonĆvolatile RAM

(NVRAM). The EPROMs contain all of the operating system code and diagĆ

nostics code for the EXP. All the memories share the latched address bus.

The SRAM (System RAM) stores miscellaneous constants that the operating

system code uses and produces. The NVRAM (nonĆvolatile RAM) contains

stored settings, stored traces, and other nonĆvolatile parameters. The meĆ

mories are organized into high and lowĆbyte pairs. The address decode PAL

generates latched chipĆselect signals. A separate latched chipĆselect signal

selects each of these pair. The memory data buffers buffer the data lines to

the Executive data bus.

Memory Data Buffers

This circuitry drives data between the memories and Executive data bus.

Both 8Ćbit buffers are enabled when all of their inputs are high.

Wait State Generator

This circuit allows the EXP to access memory devices when the EXP is

operating at faster clock frequencies. When the EXP is operating at frequenĆ

cies greater than 8 MHz, the bus cycle time is too short to allow reads or

writes to the present memory devices. The wait state generator sets the

SRDY line (see Figure 9Ć10) on the Executive bus low to signal the EXP to

lengthen the bus cycles.

The wait state generator also contains a circuit to generate control signals

(similar to those on the Executive bus). These control signals are early

address latch (ELATCH), early memory write control (EMWTC), and early

memory read control (EMRDC).

Wait State Diagnostics

These diagnostics measure the time interval that the wait state generator

generates when a one (1) is written to I/O address 8020 . This causes the

hex

wait state diagnostics to connect the SRDY signal to the DIAGNSIG line on

the Executive bus. A timer on the A14 I/O board can then measure the

length of the wait.

Memory Configuration Readback

This circuitry allows the diagnostics to read the position of the memory

configuration straps and the bank address lines. One bit of the readback

data byte also indicates if the battery is at 2.5 V (an early warning of a low

battery). The EXP performs an I/O read at address 8040

information.

to read this

hex

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

Battery Backup

This circuit provides standby power to the nonĆvolatile RAM (NVRAM) during

the poweredĆoff periods of the CSA 803C.

The A19 Strobe/TDR buffer board is comprised of three main circuits:

A19 Strobe/TDR

Buffer Board

Strobe sense select circuitry

Strobe deskew circuitry

TDR buffer and level shift circuitry

See Figure 9Ć12 for a block diagram of this board.

Strobe Sense Select

This circuitry consists of three signal diodes (these diodes are normally off).

The diodes carry the two sampling signals (J3A, J4A) from the two sampling

heads and the reference strobe signal. When a particular diode is biased on,

it allows the selected strobe sense signal to continue out of jumper J32.

Strobe Deskew

This circuit corrects the time delay between the sampling strobe signals

which may occur from the mismatch in the external cabling or in the internal

cables that distribute the strobe. The repositioning is done with the strobe

deskew voltages, which are DC control voltages found on jumper J34.

(Power is also supplied to this board through this jumper.) The strobe desĆ

kew voltages are generated on the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board and are

controlled by the microprocessor on the A5 Time Base/Controller board. The

sampling strobe alignment is checked by routing the strobe sense signals to

the A5 Time Base/Controller board where the microprocessor measures and

adjusts the time alignment of each sampling head.

TDR Buffer and Level Shift

This circuitry consists of an ECL buffer and four dualĆtransistors that levelĆ

shift the TDR signal for proper drive of the TDR step generators in the samĆ

pling heads.

3Ć26

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

The A20/A21 Head Interconnect (Power Only) boards provide power only to

the interface between the sampling head connectors (J11, J12) and ribbon

cable W150. W150 connects to the A26 M/F Acquisition Interface board and

carries the control status and power.

A20/A21 Head

Interconnect (Power

Only) Boards

The A22/A23 Head Interconnect boards provide the interface between the

sampling head connectors (J13, J14) and ribbon cable W150 and coaxial

cables W100 and W200. W150 connects to the A26 M/F Acquisition InterĆ

face board and carries the control status and power. W100 and W200 conĆ

nect to the A27 Acquisition Analog board and carry the signal from the

sampling heads.

A22/A23 Head

Interconnect Boards

The A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board provides and distributes the

power to the interconnections between the following boards:

A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board

A27 Acquisition Analog board

A28 Acquisition MPU board

A22/A23 Head Interconnect boards

See Figure 9Ć13 for the block diagram of this board.

The A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board also has a precision voltage

reference (V) to furnish the ±5 V reference required by the A27 Acquisition

Analog board.

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

The Acquisition system consists of two boards: the A27 Acquisition Analog

board and the A28 Acquisition MPU board.

A27 & A28

Acquisition System

Boards

The A27 Acquisition Analog board consists of the following major blocks:

Programmable gain amplifiers

A/D converters

Measurement hardware

Timing and sampling head control

The A28 Acquisition Analog board consists of the following major blocks:

Shared RAM

Time base/controller interface

Microprocessor

Measurement hardware

Timing and sampling head control

See Figures 9Ć14 and 9Ć15 for the block diagrams of these boards.

Programmable Gain Amplifiers

The four sampling head outputs are multiplexed to two amplifier channels

through the input multiplexer. The microprocessor selects a sampling head

channel to be acquired and connects it to one of the amplifier channels. The

programmable gain amplifier then applies offset (Vert Pos) and amplifies or

attenuates the signal (Vert Size). The output of the amplifier is applied to the

analog to digital (A/D) converter for conversion to digitized data.

A/D Converters

The output of each programmable gain amplifier is applied to an 8Ćbit flash

A/D converter. The converter compares its analog input to two reference

voltages (+1 V REF and -1 V REF) and outputs an 8Ćbit binary number that

indicates the value of the analog input signal in relation to the reference

voltages. The digital output from the A/D converters is stored in the shared

RAM and made available for transfer to the Waveform Memory through the

Time Base/Controller.

Measurement Hardware

This circuitry has the selected sampling head output from the input multiĆ

plexer applied to a precisionĆstrobed voltage comparator. This voltage

comparator compares the sampling head output voltage to a reference

voltage generated by a 14Ćbit digitalĆtoĆanalog converter (DAC). The

comparator output is then filtered by a filter and transition counter circuit on

the A28 Acquisition MPU board to remove false transitions generated by

noise and to count the transitions.

3Ć28

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

When the processor requests a hardware timing measurement such as a

propagation delay measurement, the comparator is programmed for the

appropriate measurement level and the transition counter is programmed to

locate the selected transition number and slope. The hardware counts the

strobe pulses that occur from the beginning of the acquisition to the point

where the selected transition occurs. This operation is performed on two

channels Ċ one for each crossing point of the timing measurement. When

the transition points are found, the Acquisition processor reads the sample

number from the hardware and stores it in a specific location in the shared

memory for the Time Base/Controller. The Time Base/Controller reads these

points (from each channel involved in the measurement), subtracts these

points, and then multiplies the result by the sampling interval. The result is a

measurement of the time between the two threshold points.

Timing and Sampling Head Control

This hardware generates analog control voltages that control several samĆ

pling head operating and calibration parameters. For example, the loop gain

calibration adjustment is controlled by an analog voltage generated in the

CSA 803C for each sampling head channel. In addition, three digital control

lines go to each sampling head Ċ two to enable or disable TDR on each

channel and one to enable smoothing for both channels in a head.

This circuit block also generates timing signals that control when waveform

data is digitized and when the measurement hardware is clocked. The time

base sends a strobe pulse to the acquisition system and to the sampling

head to initiate a sample. Each acquisition processor can also generate

strobe pulses locally for SelfĆTests and diagnostic purposes.

Shared RAM

This memory for the A28 Acquisition MPU board contains 16 Kbytes of

shared RAM. This memory is arbitrated on the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU

boards between the Acquisition system processor, the Time Base/Controller

processor, and the A/D converters on the A27 Acquisition Analog board. All

waveform data acquired by the Acquisition system, as well as control and

data messages passed between the Acquisition system and the Time Base/

Controller, pass through this shared memory.

Time Base/Controller Interface

This circuitry handles requests from the Time Base/Controller to access the

shared memory on the A28 Acquisition MPU boards. The shared memory is

then arbitrated and buffered through the Time Base/Controller interface

hardware. This hardware decodes and latches the Time Base/Controller

address and generates a wait signal that holds the Time Base/Controller

processor in a wait state until a bus cycle can be granted to allow the

memory access to complete.

The arbitration logic coordinates requests for access to the shared memory

from the A/D converters, the Acquisition system processor, and the time

base/controller processor.

CSA 803C Service Manual

3Ć29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram Descriptions

Microprocessor

A microprocessor controls the Acquisition system, which has 64 Kbytes of

EPROM for code storage, 16 Kbytes of shared RAM, and 8 Kbytes of unĆ

shared RAM. The microprocessor calibrates and manages the programĆ

mable gain amplifiers and measurement hardware. The microprocessor also

accepts and executes commands from the Time Base/Controller processor

and manages the sampling head digital and analog controls, including

scanning the front panel SELECT buttons on the sampling head and driving

the front panel LEDs.

3Ć30

Theory of Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Verification

This section contains procedures to check electrical specifications and

examine measurement limits listed in Table 4Ć1. Use these procedures to

check the CSA 803C following repair, or to verify that the CSA 803C meets

specifications. To functionally test the CSA 803C, simply perform the proceĆ

dures which have a yes" indication in the Functional Tests column listed in

Table 4Ć1. The Specifications or Measurement Limits are given at the beginĆ

ning of each procedure. Adjustment procedures are included in the AdjustĆ

ments section. Refer to the CSA 803C Communications Signal Analyzer User

Manual for more information about specifications and CSA 803C operation.

The Setup in each procedure provides information concerning test equipĆ

ment setup or interconnection. Refer to Table 4Ć2 for more information

concerning test equipment used in the setups.

Most Performance Verification and Adjustment procedures can be run in any

order. However, the Sampling Head Calibration must always precede other

procedures which use an operational sampling head (i.e., does not apply to

procedures using the Calibration Head). Also, if different sampling heads are

used, then sampling head calibration is required for each additional samĆ

pling head.

TableĂ4Ć1:ăMeasurement Limits, Specifications, and Functional Tests

Procedure Description

Measurement

Limits (Examine)

Specifications

(Check)

Functional

Tests

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Sampling Head

none

yes

Extended Diagnostics

Vertical Reference Voltage

+5 V ±200 mV and

-5 V ±200 mV

Horizontal Reference Clock

Vertical Accuracy

none

200,000 kHz ±5 kHz

Vertical Gain

none

±1.0% full scale

±2 mV

yes

Offset Accuracy

Vertical Linearity

±1%

System Vertical RMS Noise

200 mV at 2 mV/div

500 mV at 5 mV/div

1 mV at 10 mV/div

none

yes

632 mV at 20 mV/div

1.58 mV at 50 mV/div

3.16 mV at 100 mV/div

6.32 mV at 200 mV/div

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Verification

TableĂ4Ć1:ăMeasurement Limits, Specifications, and Functional Tests (Cont.)

Procedure Description

Measurement

Limits (Examine)

Specifications

(Check)

Functional

Tests

Sweep Rate Accuracy

0.05% at 2 ns/div

0.08% at 1 ns/div

0.8% at 100 ps/div

2.5% at 10 ps/div

10% at 1 ps/div

none

yes

Triggering

yes

300 MHz Sensitivity

1000 MHz Sensitivity

3.0 GHz Sensitivity

Internal Clock

RiseTime

100 mV at 300 MHz

pĆp

100 mV stabledisplay

100 mV at 1000 MHz

pĆp

100 mV at 3.0 GHz

pĆp

yes

v2.5 ns

100 kHz ±3%

v2.5 ns

100 kHz ±3%

Frequency

Duty Cycle

50% ±3%

Prescaler

800 mV at 2 GHz

pĆp

800 mV stabledisplay

600 mV stabledisplay

yes

600 mV at 3 GHz

pĆp

600 mV at 10 GHz

pĆp

Calibrator Output

RiseTime(typical)

250 ps

PeakĆtoĆpeak Amplitude

250 mV ±10%

4Ć2

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Verification

Table 4Ć2 (Test Equipment), contains suggested test equipment for use in

this manual. Procedure steps are based on the test equipment examples

given, but you may substitute other equipment with similar specifications.

The use of different equipment may alter test results, setup information, and

related connectors and adapters.

Test Equipment

TableĂ4Ć2:ăTest Equipment

Description

Minimum

Specification

Examples of Applicable

Test Equipment

High Frequency

Sine Wave GeneraĆ

tor

10 MHz to 10 GHz

WILTRON 6759B Opt 2

Sampling Head

SDĆSeries

SDĆ24 and any other Tektronix

SDĆSeries Sampling Head

except SDĆ14

Digital Voltmeter

(w/test leads)

v0.005% Accuracy FLUKE 8842A Digital Voltmeter

Frequency Counter One Part in

1,000,000

Accuracy

Tektronix DC 5010 Universal

Counter/Timer with a

TM 5000ĆSeries Power Module

Calibration Head

Tektronix Calibration Head

067Ć1413Ć00

Precision Voltage

Source

DATA PRECISION 8200

Test Terminal

any GPIB

IBM compatible PC with termiĆ

(IEEEĆ1978) controlĆ nal emulation software

ler, or ASCII termiĆ

nal equipped with

an RSĆ232ĆC port.

Requires compatĆ

ible RSĆ232ĆC serial

interface cable

Coaxial Cable, 50 W 50 W, 36Ćinch, male Tektronix Part 012-0482-00

(3 required)

BNC connectors

Coaxial Cable, RF

RF cable, 12 in.,

SMA connectors

Tektronix Part 174-1364-00

Tektronix Part 174-1120-00

RF cable, 8.5 in.,

SMA connectors

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Verification

TableĂ4Ć2:ăTest Equipment (Cont.)

Description

Minimum

Specification

Examples of Applicable

Test Equipment

Adapters

BNC femaleĆtoĆmale Tektronix Part 103-0090-00

Dual Banana

BNC maleĆtoĆfemale Tektronix Part 103-0035-00

Dual Banana

SMA maleĆtoĆBNC

female (8 required)

Tektronix Part 015-1018-00

SMA femaleĆtoĆBNC Tektronix Part 013-0126-00

male

SMA maleĆtoĆN

male

Tektronix Part 015-0369-00

Power Divider, 50 W 6 dB load isolation, Tektronix Part 015-1014-00

50 W, SMA connecĆ

tors

Termination, 50 W

Attenuator, 10X

Attenuator, 2X

Impedance, 50 W;

accuracy within 2%;

SMA connectors,

Tektronix Part 015-1022-00

Tektronix Part 011-0059-02

Tektronix Part 015-1001-00

20 dB attenuation,

50 W, one male and

one female

50 W, SMA, one

male and one feĆ

male

Power Supplies

Troubleshooting

Fixture

Tektronix 067-1264-00

Extended Diagnostics

11000ĆSeries Power Supplies

troubleshooting fixture

Probe, 10X

Attenuation 10X

Tektronix P6106A

Pickoff, 10X

Power Meter

Power Sensor

Alignment Tool

Picosecond Pulse Labs 5520A

HP 436A

HP 8485A

Plastic hex

Tektronix Part 003-0301-00

Tektronix Part 003-0675-01

Tektronix Part 003-1400-00

Insulated slot

Square Tip

(ceramic)

Magnetic ScrewĆ

driver

Holder for Torx

head tips

Tektronix Part 003-0293-00

4Ć4

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Verification

TableĂ4Ć2:ăTest Equipment (Cont.)

Description

Minimum

Specification

Examples of Applicable

Test Equipment

Torx Head ScrewĆ

driver

#10 tip

Tektronix Part 003-0814-00

#15 tip

#20 tip

Tektronix Part 003-0966-00

Tektronix Part 003-0866-00

Tektronix Part 013-0198-00

External Loopback

Connector

RSĆ232ĆC connecĆ

tor

Shorting Strap

Two alligator clips

on a short pigtail

conductor

Integrated Circuit

Extracting Tool

IC InsertionĆExtracĆ General Tool P/N U505BG or

tion Pliers, 28Ćpin

type

equivalent

Board Removal

Tools

StraightĆslot screwĆ

driver, large

TorxĆdrive screwĆ

driver.

TĆ7, TĆ8, TĆ10, TĆ15,

TĆ20, TĆ25

Allen (hex) Wrench,

1/16Ćinch

Nutdrivers,

3/16Ćinch, 1/4Ćinch,

7/16Ćinch

NeedleĆnose pliers

Half inch rulings

Small Ruler

Antistatic wrist strap

Tektronix Part 006-3415-04

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Verification

Photocopy pages 4Ć7 through 4Ć10 and use them to record the perforĆ

mance test results for your instrument.

Test Record

4Ć6

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Verification

CSA 803C Test Record

Instrument Serial Number:

Temperature:

Date of Calibration:

Certificate Number:

RH %:

Technician:

Performance Test

Minimum

Incoming

Outgoing

Maximum

Vertical Accuracy

Vertical Gain, First Compartment Acquisition Measurement:

Channel 1

"1.2% at Checkpoint

Step 11.

5 mV/div

-20.5 mV

-41.0 mV

-82 mV

-205 mV

-410 mV

-820 mV

19.5 mV

39.0 mV

78 mV

__________

-19.5 mV

-39.0 mV

-78 mV

-195 mV

-390 mV

-780 mV

20.5 mV

41.0 mV

82 mV

10 mV/div

20 mV/div

50 mV/div

100 mV/div

200 mV/div

5 mV/div

10 mV/div

20 mV/div

50 mV/div

100 mV/div

200 mV/div

195 mV

205 mV

390 mV

410 mV

780 mV

820 mV

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Verification

CSA 803C Test Record (Cont.)

Minimum Incoming

Performance Test

Outgoing

Maximum

Vertical Gain, First Compartment Acquisition Measurement:

Channel 2

"1.2% at Checkpoint

Step 11.

5 mV/div

-20.5 mV

-41.0 mV

-82 mV

-205 mV

-410 mV

-820 mV

19.5 mV

39.0 mV

78 mV

__________

-19.5 mV

-39.0 mV

-78 mV

-195 mV

-390 mV

-780 mV

20.5 mV

41.0 mV

82 mV

10 mV/div

20 mV/div

50 mV/div

100 mV/div

200 mV/div

5 mV/div

__________

10 mV/div

20 mV/div

50 mV/div

100 mV/div

200 mV/div

195 mV

205 mV

390 mV

410 mV

780 mV

820 mV

Vertical Offset Accuracy, First Compartment

"2 mV

Step 10.

Step 12.

400 mV

1 V

398 mV

__________

402 mV

0.998 V

1.002 V

2 V

1.998 V

2.002 V

-400 mV

-1 V

-402 mV

-1.002 V

-2.002 V

-398 mV

-0.998 V

-1.998 V

-2 V

Vertical Gain, Third Compartment Acquisition Measurement:

Channel 1

"1.2% at Checkpoint

Step 11.

5 mV/div

-20.5 mV

-41.0 mV

-82 mV

__________

-19.5 mV

-39.0 mV

-78 mV

10 mV/div

20 mV/div

50 mV/div

100 mV/div

200 mV/div

__________

-205 mV

-410 mV

-820 mV

-195 mV

-390 mV

-780 mV

4Ć8

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Verification

CSA 803C Test Record (Cont.)

Performance Test

5 mV/div

Minimum

19.5 mV

39.0 mV

78 mV

Incoming

Outgoing

Maximum

20.5 mV

41.0 mV

82 mV

__________

10 mV/div

20 mV/div

50 mV/div

195 mV

390 mV

780 mV

205 mV

410 mV

820 mV

100 mV/div

200 mV/div

Vertical Gain, Third Compartment Acquisition Measurement

Channel 2

"1.2% at checkpoint

Step 11.

5 mV/div

-20.5 mV

-41.0 mV

-82 mV

-205 mV

-410 mV

-820 mV

19.5 mV

39.0 mV

78 mV

__________

-19.5 mV

-39.0 mV

-78 mV

-195 mV

-390 mV

-780 mV

20.5 mV

41.0 mV

82 mV

10 mV/div

20 mV/div

50 mV/div

100 mV/div

200 mV/div

5 mV/div

__________

10 mV/div

20 mV/div

50 mV/div

100 mV/div

200 mV/div

195 mV

205 mV

390 mV

410 mV

780 mV

820 mV

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Verification

CSA 803C Test Record (Cont.)

Performance Test

Vertical Offset Accuracy, ThirdCompartment

Minimum

Incoming

Outgoing

Maximum

"2 mV

Step 10.

Step 12.

400 mV

1 V

398 mV

__________

402 mV

0.998 V

1.002 V

2 V

1.998 V

2.002 V

-400 mV

-1 V

-402 mV

-1.002 V

-2.002 V

-398 mV

-0.998 V

-1.998 V

-2 V

Sweep Rate Accuracy

ns Sweep Rate Accuracy

Step 10.

Step 14.

2 ns/div ("0.05%)

1 ns/div ("0.08%)

18.172 ns

9.083 ns

__________

18.192 ns

9.098 ns

__________

ps Sweep Rate Accuracy

Step 18.

Step 28.

Step 40.

100 ps/div ("0.8%)

10 ps/div ("2.5%)

1 ps/div ("10%)

902 ps

248.1 mV

__________

916 ps

260.5 mV

28.3 mV

23.1 mV

Internal Clock

Step 7.

Step 9.

Rise Time

Frequency

Duty Cycle

__________

2.5 ns

103 kHz

53%

97 kHz

47%

Calibrator Output

Step 7.

Rise Time

Amplitude

__________

≈250 ps

225 mV

275 mV

4Ć10

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Verification

Some procedures begin with a setup illustration that shows what test equipĆ

ment is needed and how to connect it. The other procedures require only a

calibrated SDĆSeries Sampling Head. Refer to Table 4Ć2 (Test Equipment),

on the preceding pages for an example of the test equipment for each

procedure.

Using These

Procedures

Conventions in this Manual

In these procedures, the following conventions are used:

CAPITAL letters within the body of text identify front panel controls,

indicators, and connectors on the CSA 803C (for example, MEASURE)

and sampling head.

Bold letters identify menu labels and display messages.

Initial Capital letters identify connectors, controls, and indicators (for

example, On) on associated test equipment.

In some steps, the first word is italicized to identify a step that contains a

performance verification and an adjustment instruction. For example, if

Check is the first word in the title of a step, an electrical specification is

checked. If Adjust appears in the title, the step involves an electrical

adjustment. If Examine is thefirst word in thetitle, thestep concerns

measurement limits that indicate whether the CSA 803C is operating

properly; these limits are not to be interpreted as electrical specificaĆ

tions.

Menu Selections and Measurement Techniques

Details on measurement techniques and instructions for making menu

selections are generally not included in these procedures. Comprehensive

descriptions of menus and CSA 803C features are located in the CSA 803C

Communications Signal Analyzer User Manual.

User Manual

Reviewing the CSA 803C Communications Signal Analyzer User Manual is

strongly recommended to familiarize the firstĆtime user with CSA 803C

controls and features.

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Verification

4Ć12

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

This section contains the procedures to check the electrical specifications

and examine the measurement limits listed in Table 4Ć1. To functionally test

the CSA 803C, simply perform the procedures which have a yes" indication

in the Functional Tests column. The Specifications or Measurement Limits

are given at the beginning of each procedure. Adjustment procedures are

included in the Adjustment section. Refer to the CSA 803C Communications

Signal Analyzer User Manual for more information about CSA 803C operaĆ

tion. The Setup in each procedure provides information concerning test

equipment setup or interconnection. Refer to Table 4Ć2 for more information

concerning test equipment used in the setups.

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

This procedure should be performed within the ambient temperature range

of +18_ C to +28_ C (64_ F to 82_ F) when a performance check at peak

operating conditions is required.

PowerĆOn

Diagnostics

Setup to Invoke PowerĆOn Diagnostics

CSA 803C

Sampling

Head

(not

installed

yet)

Procedure to Invoke PowerĆOn Diagnostics

CAUTION

Applying a voltage outside the range printed on the sampling head

can result in damage. Static electricity is also a hazard.

The input diodes used in the sampling heads are very susceptible to damĆ

age from overdrive signal or DC voltages and from electrostatic discharge.

Never apply a voltage outside the range printed on the front of the sampling

head. Operate the CSA 803C only in a staticĆcontrolled environment.

Connect the wrist strap provided with the CSA 803C to the ANTISTATIC

CONNECTION, as shown in Figure 2Ć1. Refer to the CSA 803C CommunicaĆ

tions Signal Analyzer User Manual for more information.

ăStep 1:ăCheck that the sampling head is not yet installed and that the

ON/STANDBYswitch is in the STANDBYposition.

ăStep 2:ăRemove the top and bottom covers from the CSA 803C (unless

you are only performing a functional test).

ăStep 3:ăInstall an SD Series sampling head in the left sampling head

compartment marked CH 1/CH 2.

ăStep 4:ăWith the CSA 803C's rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH

set to OFF, connect the CSA 803C to a suitable power source.

4Ć14

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 5:ăSet the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to ON and then

set the CSA 803C's front panel ON/STANDBY switch to ON.

When the CSA 803C is first installed, the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER

SWITCH should be set to and left in the ON position. From then on, use

the front panel ON/STANDBY switch to perform all subsequent power

switching.

ăStep 6:ăMonitor the following diagnostic run functions, and note the

range of possible results.

Diagnostics

Each time the front panel ON/STANDBY switch is set to ON, the CSA 803C

performs Kernel diagnostics on its microprocessor subsystems, followed by

SelfĆTest diagnostics on most of its major circuits. Failures from either of

these two sets of diagnostics may cause the CSA 803C to enter the ExĆ

tended Diagnostics menu as described in this procedure.

When Kernel diagnostics begin, the Diagnostics in Progress and Comm

Test in Progress messages are displayed on the screen. If the CSA 803C is

being poweredĆon from a cold condition, then the diagnostics may be

completed before the CRT is warmed up and able to display these mesĆ

sages. Diagnostic routines are then performed in parallel on each of the

CSA 803C's microprocessor subsystems (Display, Executive, Time Base,

and Mainframe Acquisition). Following successful execution of their Kernel

diagnostics, Acquisition microprocessors attempt to communicate with the

Time Base microprocessor and the Time Base and Display microprocessors

attempt to communicate with the Executive microprocessor.

Successful completion of Kernel diagnostics is indicated by the start of

SelfĆTest diagnostics. A failure of Kernel diagnostics will be indicated by the

message, Dsy Kernel Failure, or Comm Test in Progress displaying on the

screen (for Display kernel failures) and/or by a single highĆlow beep and

illuminated menu button indicators (for Executive kernel failures).

SelfĆTest Diagnostics

These begin by displaying SelfĆTest in Progress (when the Display microĆ

processor has successfully communicated with the Executive microprocesĆ

sor). Pattern changes on the display and the flashing of the display indicate

a test in progress. The SelfĆTest diagnostics are successfully completed

when the CSA 803C returns to normal operation. Any failures cause the CSA

803C to produce a double highĆlow beep, and then to display the Extended

Diagnostics menu on the screen. Faulty field replaceable units (FRUs) may

then be identified by touching the (?)Help label. If any errors occur, record

the error codes for the failed circuit block(s), and then refer the CSA 803C to

aqualified service person.

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

Front panel controls are active during the SelfĆTest diagnostic sequence;

however, any disturbance of these controls causes a test failure. If such a

failure occurs, the CSA 803C automatically enters the Extended Diagnostics

mode and displays the Extended Diagnostics menu. Touch the Exit label

twice to remove this menu. Note that if the diagnostics detect a fatal fault, it

may not be possible to exit the menu.

PowerĆOn Diagnostics Complete

This state is signified when the CSA 803C returns to normal operation. If the

CSA 803C passes PowerĆOn Diagnostics, the frontĆpanel settings that were

in effect at the last powerĆoff are restored.

4Ć16

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

This procedure shows the setup and lists the test steps for calibrating Loop

Gain and Offset Null. Note that this is an optional enhanced accuracy proceĆ

dure and it fine tunes internal channel processing circuitry in conjunction

with any operational sampling head type being used (the 067-1413-00

calibration head is a service device and does not require system calibration).

This procedure also initiates a builtĆin CSA 803A program which causes the

mainframe to remember which sampling head type was used in the calibraĆ

tion. In this way, preĆcalibrated heads can be interchanged without requiring

recalibration.

Sampling Heads

Setup to Calibrate a Sampling Head

Sampling Head (except SDĆ14)

CSA 803C

(not connected yet)

12I RF Cable

50 W Termination

(not connected yet)

Procedure to Calibrate a Sampling Head

ăStep 1:ăPowerĆup and Initialize as follows:

Set the ON/STANDBY switch to ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rocker / press

UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (verify) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 2:ăSet up first AutomaticCalibration as follows:

Press the UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Page to Enhanced Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Gain (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Identify Channel (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Automatic Calibrate (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 3:ăPerform the Loop Gain calibration as follows:

Connect the CALIBRATOR output to the sampling head input to be

calibrated (2).

Select Proceed (in the Loop Gain popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . touch

Store Constants (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 4:ăSet up second Automatic Calibration as follows:

Disconnect the calibration cable from the sampling head input.

Offset (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Automatic Calibrate (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 5:ăPerform the Offset Null calibration as follows:

Connect a 50 W termination to the sampling head input.

Select Proceed (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Store Constants (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Exit (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 6:ăRepeat Steps 1 through 5 for all sampling head compartments

and channels being tested.

4Ć18

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

The Extended Diagnostics perform more extensive testing than the SelfĆTest

diagnostics. They can be used to assist troubleshooting, particularly in

service environments.

Extended

Diagnostics

Setup to Invoke Extended Diagnostics

CSA 803C

If the CSA 803C entered the normal operatingmode without any diagnostic

failures, perform the followingsteps to enter the Extended Diagnostics

mode. Do not attach inputs or I/O cables to the CSA 803C for these tests.

Procedure to Invoke Extended Diagnostics

ăStep 1:ăWith the samplinghead installed as illustrated, check initial

conditions as follows:

Set the CSA 803C ON/STANDBY switch to ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Check samplinghead Select button is OFF . . visually check indicator

CAUTION

You may lose stored settings, stored traces, or other data stored in

NVRAM by turning the power off (that is, setting the ON/STANDBY

switch to STANDBY or the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF)

during the execution ofthe Extended Diagnostic tests that deal with

the Executive processor's NVRAM tests. However, this does not

seriously affect oscilloscope operation.

Select the UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Page toEnhanced Accuracy (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Page toUtility2 (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Extended Diagnostic (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Extended Diagnostic (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select All, and then Run to start the tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 2:ăCheck that all tests have executed and have a Pass status.

Then make the following selections in the order shown:

Executive (if not already highlighted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Block (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

External I/O (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Area (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

GPIB (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Routine (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 3:ăSelect and run the following tests:

Select Run to start the Intrpt Reset test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Reset Status, and then Run to start the test . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Data Lines, and then Run to start the test . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Interrupt, and then Run to start the test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 4:ăCheck that all four of the previous tests have executed and

passed. Then exit as follows:

Select Exit twice to exit Extended Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

4Ć20

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

This procedure checks that the vertical reference voltages are at +5 Vand

-5 Vat J63C on the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board (see FigĆ

ure 4Ć1).

Vertical Reference

Voltage

This procedure should only be performed if maintenance is required.

This procedure is not necessary for verifying instrument specificaĆ

tions.

Specifications

The measured voltage must be within the limits of 5 V±200 mVand -5 V

±200 mV.

Setup to Check Vertical Reference Voltage

CSA 803C

Digital Voltmeter

Low

To ±5 V

A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board

(see Figure 4Ć1)

To GND

Procedure to Check Vertical Reference Voltage

ăStep 1:ăInitialize the CSA 803C settings as follows:

UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (in verification popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 2:ăConnect the Digital Voltmeter to the +5 V reference point and

GND on the A26 Mainframe (M/F) Acquisition Interconnect board. See

Figure 4Ć1.

ăStep 3:ăSet the Voltmeter for DC Voltage, and check for a reading of

+5V, ±200 mV.

ăStep 4:ăConnect the Digital Voltmeter to the -5 V reference point and

GND on the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board.

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 5:ăSet the Voltmeter for DC Voltage, and check for a reading of

-5 V, ±200 mV.

If the readings noted in Steps 3 or 5 are outside the stated limits,

then servicing of the CSA 803C is required before continuing to the

Horizontal Reference Clock procedure.

+5 -5 GND

Test Points

Figure 4Ć1:ăA26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect Board Test Point Locations

4Ć22

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

This procedure verifies the correct operation and accuracy of the

CSA 803A's horizontal reference clock (see Figure 4Ć2).

Horizontal

Reference Clock

This procedure should only be performed if maintenance is required.

This procedure is not necessary for verifying instrument specificaĆ

tions.

Specifications

The operational frequency specification for the horizontal reference clock is

200,000 kHz ±5 kHz.

Setup to Check Horizontal Reference Clock

CSA 803C

Frequency

Counter

10X Probe

To Pin 9

of U191

A5 Time Base/

Controller Board

(See Figure 4Ć2)

To Pin 1

of U191

Procedure to Check Horizontal Reference Clock

ăStep 1:ăInitialize the CSA 803C settings as follows:

UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (in verification popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 2:ăPerform the following operations on the CSA 803C in the order

listed:

Set the front panel ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY.

Set the CSA 803C on its right side (as viewed from facing the front

of the CSA 803C).

Set the CSA 803C front panel ON/STANDBY switch to ON.

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 3:ăSet the Frequency Counter controls/output as follows:

Frequency counter

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency A

Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC

Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +(positive)

Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1X

Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MW

ăStep 4:ăAt U191 on the A5 Time Base/Controller board, touch the 10X

Probe to pin 9 and the ground probe to pin 1.

ăStep 5:ăCheck that the frequency counter reads within the limits of

199,995 kHz and 200,005 kHz.

U1000

C1413

R710

C800

R803

R802

R801

R800

J91

U700

U701

U100

U200

U300

U400

U501

U500

R901

R900

R1402

C1001

C3702

U901

R1000

C1000

C901

C902

R810

E901

E902

U801

R1001

R1002

U1001

U1200

U1510

R1003

R1004

MH400

R1005

J902

R3841

R3911

MH100

J903

R1324

R1323

C1511

C1004

C1003

U702

U710

C3841

C811

R1210

R1302

U1010

U1011

U1110

J1320

C1223

C1326

CR1210

U1210

C812

U1310

U1312

C110

C210

C410

C510

C511

C610

U610

C710

U711

C310

C1214

U1211

C130C11302

U1311

J15

J32

U910

U911

U810

C810

U820

J16

C3301

C3202

C1501

R1010

R1011

C1216

C1320

U1332

R1345

C1111

C1220

C1010

U3061

U1220

C1020

C920

U920

R3304

U51430

14 15

C921

U930

U3020

R720

2224

U1021

U3060

U1121

16 17

C1560

R3704

16 17

2224

1921

U830

U831

U1320

1921

2325

TP1371

2325

C530

SH100

C3700C3211

R3321

R3322

R3323 C3214

U3032

J1570

R1313

R1312

C1321

U1330

U3050

U3021

C330

R1130

U1040 U1140

U1570

J730

J830

C1130

R1356

R1359

R730

C740

R840

C840

C830

U841

R930

U940

C440

U941

U1041

C640

U640

C741

U741

R4002

R4001

CR4001

R3211

R3215

R3212

L3500

U740

U840

U3014

C3305

C1561

C141

C240

U1630

16 17

R1474

J30A

Q4005

CR4005

R4005

R4006

U3081

U440

C3310

R3312

C140

U150

1921

2325

C3530

SH500

R1150

R1570

R1573

U240

C650

U651

C750

U750

C751

U751

C850

U850

C851

U851

C950

U950

C1050

C1150

R3135

U3013

C951

C1051

R3318

C3312

U1460

R3223

SH200

U951

U1050

U1150

U1151

28 26

R450

C1213

R3801

R350

U1581

R351

R352

R353

U53031

TP550

TP551

TP552

10 22

DS156

J450

U551

U650

13151720

TP251

16 17

U3080

2224

TP250

J451

C250

20 27

TP553

TP554

TP555

TP556

C1611

R3131

C3110

12141618

DS157

C160

R150

C161

TP260

TP360

1921 25

C260

U260

R260

U360

C360

U361

R3137

J24A

J25A

J24B

J25B

J29A

J860

J861

R3132

R3113

R761

C760

R660

C660

R760

C761

U161

U250

R3111

U53051

C460

C860

U860

C961

U961

C1061

C1060

C1161

C1160

C960

U960

R570

J24D

16 17

2224

U3052

U3011

U460

U760

U560

U561

U660

U661

U761

U1060

U1061

U1160

U1161

U3056

1921

2325

R3513

J25D

J24C

C370

U371

C270

U370

R3514

L3510

C170

R170

R270

TP770 TP772

TP270

R3561

C1270

C470

SH700

R3112

C3112

C3160

TP771

U770

R3516

R3506

U1252

J35

TP870

U870

R670

R970

R1070

TP1070

SH300

C570

U580

C571

U581

2826242220

U3015

R580

TP584

TP1071

U970

U971

R3151

U771

C1211

C1071

U1080

C1170

U1180

C1171

U1181

U3016

J25C

C1070

R480

U481

C680

TP580

TP581

R1472

R980

C381

U380

C380

U381

TP1471

R1473

U1081

U881

U480

C780

U780

U680

U1371

R1252

R1631

TP582

R590

TP1570

TP583

U582

U880

U981

U980

U583

TP585

U790

F1180

U1480

C1381

TP980

TP981

TP982

TP983

C1283

U1280

C1371

C1190

C1481

C490

U490

C491

U491

TP586

TP1370

MH200

R1090

C1191

C1292 C1392 C1490

C1280

R1091

MH300

C190

U190

C290

U290

C390

C391

U1380

C392

U391

TP984

TP1090

R890

C890

C1090

J18

L1291

L1290

L1292

R1190

C1290

C1192

C1291

C1391

C1390

R690

U390

DS1190

U191

SH600

TP591

TP590

C1293

C492

C493

J83

Pin 1

R190

R390

J23

U191

Pin 9

Figure 4Ć2:ăA5 Time Base/Controller Board Test Point Locations

4Ć24

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

This procedure shows the setups and lists the steps to check the vertical

accuracy of the CSA 803C.

Vertical Accuracy

Setup to Check Vertical Gain

Calibration Head

CSA 803C

DIRECT Input

Prec. Voltage Source

50 W Coaxial Cable

Procedure to Check Vertical Gain

ăStep 1:ăInstall a Calibration Head (067-1413-00) into the position

shown in the setup diagram (CHĂ1/CHĂ2 slot). If the unit is in Standby

mode, set the power switch to ON. Set the Precision Voltage Source to

0 V and connect it to Channel 2 of the Calibration Head.

NOTE

If powering up from a cold start, the diagnostics will report an error

using the Calibration Head. The report will indicate a Time Base

error. To clear this, exit the diagnostics. Then, ignore the subseĆ

quent time base calibration failure notice and continue with the

following steps.

ăStep 2:ăInitialize the mainframe as follows:

UTILITYbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (in verification popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 3:ăTrigger the CSA 803C as follows:

TRIGGER button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Source (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Internal Clock (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 4:ăIdentify the trace as follows:

Def Tra icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Identify Channel (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Enter Desc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 5:ăSet the mainframe Vert Offset as follows:

Vert size icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Set Vert Size:M2 to 2 mV/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

ăStep 6:ă Set Averaging as follows:

Acquire Desc (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Average N (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 7:ăSelect the Mean Measurement as follows:

MEASURE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Measurements (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Mean (in the Measurements popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Compare & References (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Save Current Meas Values as References (in popĆup menu) . touch

Compare off (to on in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 8:ăSet the Voltage source to 8 mV.

Select Remove/Clr Trace (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Clear Trace (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 9:ăWait for averaging to complete. Then, check that the DMean

value is to be within 7.8 mV (lower spec) and 8.2 mV (upper spec).

NOTE

Averaging will complete faster if you exit the measurement menu

and then return when averaging is complete. Alternatively, use the

dial to move the Main Size setting two notches higher than the

default setting.

ăStep 10:ăChange the polarity of the voltage differential coming from the

precision voltage Source. Check that the DMean value is between

-7.8 mV and -8.2 mV.

4Ć26

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep11:ă Refer to Table 4Ć3 and check actual results against the table

specifications for the setting levels indicated.

NOTE

Specifications are one percent of full scale at each volts/div setting.

Example: at 5 mV/div full scale for 10 div is 50 mV, which gives an

upper and lower spec tolerance of +0.5 mV and -0.5 mV.

TableĂ4Ć3:ăVoltage Source Settings

Sens.

5 mV/div

Source V

Lower Spec

Upper Spec

-20 mV

-40 mV

-80 mV

-200 mV

-400 mV

-800 mV

-20.5 mV

-41.0 mV

-82 mV

-19.5 mV

-39.0 mV

-78 mV

10 mV/div

20 mV/div

50 mV/div

100 mV/div

200 mV/div

-205 mV

-410 mV

-820 mV

-195 mV

-390 mV

-780 mV

5 mV/div

10 mV/div

20 mV/div

50 mV/div

100 mV/div

200 mV/div

20 mV

19.5 mV

39.0 mV

78 mV

20.5 mV

41.0 mV

82 mV

40 mV

80 mV

200 mV

400 mV

800 mV

195 mV

390 mV

780 mV

205 mV

410 mV

820 mV

NOTE

Up to now, you have been working with trace 1 (Channel2) and

internalmainframe acquisition measurement channel1. Use the

following steps to verify the vertical accuracy through internal

acquisition measurement channel2, using trace 2. (Don't remove

Voltage Source from Calibration Head Channel 2).

ăStep12:ă Initialize the mainframe as follows:

UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (in verification popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep13:ă Trigger the CSA 803C as follows:

TRIGGER button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Source (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Internal Clock (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 14:ăDefinethefirst traceas follows:

Def Tra icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Identify Channel (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Enter Desc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Notethat Trace 1 has been selected at the base of the screen (just

above M1 Main).

ăStep 15:ăDefine the second trace as follows:

Def Tra icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Identify Channel (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Enter Desc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Notethat Trace 2 has now been selected at the base of the screen (just

above M2 Main).

ăStep 16:ăRepeat steps 5 through 12.

ăStep 17:ăPower down the CSA 803C.

Setup to Check Offset Accuracy

Calibration Head

CSA 803C

DIRECT Input

Prec. Voltage Source

50 W Coaxial Cable

Procedure to Check Offset Accuracy

ăStep 1:ăThis second vertical accuracy test uses the same setup prelimiĆ

naries as the previous test. The Calibration Head/Time Base error will

only reĆappear if you have activated powerĆup diagnostics. If so, exit

diagnostics and, in either case, continue from here.

ăStep 2:ăInitializethemainframeas follows:

UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (in verification popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

4Ć28

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 3:ăTrigger the CSA 803C as follows:

TRIGGER button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Source (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Internal Clock (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 4:ăDefine the trace as follows:

Def Tra icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Identify Channel (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Enter Desc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 5:ăSet Averaging as follows:

Acquire Desc (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Average N (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 6:ăSelect the Mean Measurement as follows:

MEASURE Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Measurements (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Mean (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Compare & Reference (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Save Current Meas Values as References

(in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Compare off (changes to on / in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 7:ăSet the Vertical Size and Offset as follows:

Vertical size icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Adjust the Vert Size: M2 to 10 mV/div . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

Vert Offset: M2 (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Key in 400 mV( 400m) on the popĆup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Check that 400 mV has now entered into the display below Vert Offset:

M2.

ăStep 8:ăConnect the Voltage Source to the DIRECT input of the CalibraĆ

tion Head.

ăStep 9:ăAdjust the Voltage Source to 400 mV.

ăStep 10:ăWait for averaging to complete. Then, check that DMean value

is between -2 mVand +2 mV.

ăStep 11:ăRepeat Steps 2 through 10 for the offset values shown in

Table 4Ć4.

ăStep 12:ăPowerĆoff the CSA 803C.

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

TableĂ4Ć4:ăVertical Offset Test Values

Sens.

Source V/

Vert Offset

Lower Spec

Upper Spec

10 mV/div

1 V

2 V

0.998 V

1.998 V

1.002 V

2.002 V

-400 mV

-1 V

-402 mV

-1.002 V

-2.002 V

-398 mV

-0.998 V

-1.998 V

-2 V

4Ć30

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

This procedure uses the RMS measurement function to measure the noise

on the trace from a sampling head compartment.

System Vertical

RMS Noise

Setupto Examine Vertical RMS Noise

Calibration Head

CSA 803C

Procedure to Examine Vertical RMS Noise

ăStep1:ă Install the Calibration Head (067-1413-00) into the position

shown in the setup diagram. If the unit was in standby mode, set the

ON/STANDBYswitch to ON.

NOTE

If powering up from a cold start, the diagnostics will report an error

using the Calibration Head. The report will indicate a Time Base

error. To clear this, exit the diagnostics. Then, ignore the subseĆ

quent time base calibration failure notice and continue with the

following steps.

ăStep2:ă Initialize the mainframe as follows:

UTILITYbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (in verification popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep3:ă Trigger the CSA 803C as follows:

TRIGGER button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Source (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Internal Clock (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep4:ă Identify the trace as follows:

Def Tra icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Identify Channel (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Enter Desc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep5:ă Set the mainframe Vert Size as follows:

Vert Size icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Set Vert Size:M1 to 2 mV/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

ăStep6:ă Set the record length as follows:

Horizontal Desc (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Main Record Length (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Set Main Record Len to 5120 points . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

ăStep7:ă Store the trace as follows:

STORE/RECALL button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Store Trace (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Trace 1 (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Note that you must touch Trace 1 even though it is highlighted in

the menu.

Recall Trace (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

STO 1 (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep8:ă Measure the Mean value as follows:

MEASURE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Measurements (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Mean (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Exit Menu (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

NOTE

Record (write down) the mean value for use in the next step.

ăStep9:ă Define the trace to be stored as follows:

Def Tra icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Stored Traces (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Stored 1 (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Enter STO1 - (mean value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Use the popĆup key pad to enter the STO1 - (mean value)

recorded in Step 8.

NOTE

For example, if mean value is 50.2 mV, you would key in

-(50.2 EEX - 6)". STO1 already appears on upper left of display.

Exponents are entered by pressing the EEX key, followed by the

sign of the exponent (if negative), followed by the exponent value.

4Ć32

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

Enter Desc (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 10:ăMeasuretheRMS valueas follows:

MEASURE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Measurements (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

RMS (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Check that RMS is v200 mV.

Exit Menu (to exit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 11:ăErase the test traces as follows:

STORE/RECALL button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Delete Trace (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

All Traces (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Delete Selected Traces (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 12:ăRepeat Steps 4 through 11 at the sensitivities listed in

Table 4Ć5 and check the resulting RMS against the matching specificaĆ

tion valuein thetable.

TableĂ4Ć5:ăSensitivity Settings

Sensitivity

Upper Limit

5 mV/div

10 mV/div

20 mV/div

50 mV/div

100 mV/div

200 mV/div

500 mV

1 mV

632 mV

1.58 mV

3.16 mV

6.32 mV

ăStep 13:ăPowerĆoff theCSA 803C. Movethecalibration head to the

second slot (CH3/CH4) and repeat steps 1Ć12.

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

This procedure shows the setups and lists the steps to check the Sweep

Rate Accuracy.

Sweep Rate Accuracy

Setup to Examine Sweep Rate Accuracy

CH 1 SDĆ24

CSA 803C

High

Frequency

Signal

Generator

Output

50 W Coaxial Cable

50 W

Coaxial Cables

Power Divider

Procedure to Examine Sweep Rate Accuracy

ăStep 1:ăInstall the SDĆ24 Sampling Head into the compartment shown

in the setup diagram (CH 1/CH 2 slot). If the unit was in standby mode

set the ON/STANDBY switch to ON.

ăStep 2:ăInitialize the mainframe as follows:

UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (in verification popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 3:ăSet the horizontal record length as follows:

Horizontal Desc (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

MainRecord Length (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Set MainRecord Len to 1024 points . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

ăStep 4:ăIdentify the trace as follows:

Def Tra icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Identify Channel (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Enter Desc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

4Ć34

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 5:ăEngage high precision calibration mode as follows:

UTILITYbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Page to Enhanced Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Time Base Cal Mode (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

High Prec (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Exit (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Sweep Rate Accuracy 2 ns/div

ăStep 6:ăAdjust the Sweep Rate to 2 ns/div.

Horizontal icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Set Main Size to 2 ns/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

ăStep 7:ăAdjust the Signal Generator to the following settings:

Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 MHz

Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 V

RMS

NOTE

Check that selected Sampling Head channel (1) indicator is flashĆ

ing. If not, select channel (1) by pressing select button.

ăStep 8:ăTurn mainframe averaging on.

WAVEFORM button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Acquire Desc (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Average N On (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Exit (in the popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

NOTE

Position the display so the sine wave is centered on the screen. To

ensure accurate period measurement, the display must be a full

cycle.

ăStep 9:ăObtain Period as follows:

MEASURE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Measurement (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Period (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Exit Menu (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 10:ăExamine that the period is between 18.172 ns and 18.192 ns,

showing that the sweep rate accuracy is within .05%.

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

Sweep Rate Accuracy 1 ns/div

ăStep 11:ăAdjust the Sweep Rate to 1 ns/div.

Horizontal (

) icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Set Main Size to 1 ns/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

ăStep 12:ăAdjust the Signal Generator to the following settings:

Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 MHz

Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 V

RMS

ăStep 13:ăPress the UTILITY button and adjust the lower knob for a

display showing a full waveform.

ăStep 14:ă Press the MEASURE button and check for a period interval

between 9.083 ns and 9.098 ns, showing that the sweep rate accuracy

is within 0.08%.

Sweep Rate Accuracy 100 ps/div

ăStep 15:ăUse the upper control knob to adjust the Main Size to 100 ps/

div.

ăStep 16:ăAdjust the Signal Generator to the following settings:

Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 GHz

Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 V (1.4 V

pĆp

)

RMS

(Set for 1.000 ±0.004 V on screen.)

pĆp

ăStep 17:ăPress the UTILITY button and adjust the lower knob for a

display showing a full waveform.

ăStep 18:ăPress the MEASURE button and check for a period interval

between 902 ps and 916 ps, showing that the sweep rate accuracy is

within 0.8%.

Sweep Rate Accuracy 10 ps/div

ăStep 19:ăAdjust the Signal Generator to the following settings:

Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 MHz

Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 V (1.4 V

pĆp

)

RMS

(Set for 1.000 ±0.004 V on screen.)

pĆp

ăStep 20:ăInvoke smoothing as follows:

WAVEFORM button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Sampling Head Fnc's (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Smoothing On (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Exit (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 21:ăAdjust the Main Size to 1130 ps/div.

4Ć36

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 22:ăAdjust the Main Pos to 55 ns.

ăStep 23:ăSet the Main Pos control (lower knob) so that the zero crossĆ

ing of the waveform occurs on the center graticule.

ăStep 24:ăSet the horizontal reference point to Center as follows, so that

the waveform will be expanded about the horizontal center:

WAVEFORM button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Horizontal Desc (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Center (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 25:ăAdjust the Vertical Size as follows:

Vertical icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Set Vert Size to 50 mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

ăStep 26:ăAdjust the Main Size as follows:

Horizontal icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Set the Main Size to 10 ps/div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

ăStep 27:ăActivate the cursors as follows:

Cursors icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 28:ăRead the Dv located in the major menu. Dv should be within

-260.5 mV and -248.1 mV or +248.1 mV and +260.5 mV, showing

that the sweep rate accuracy is within 2.5%.

ăStep 29:ăTouch Exit (in the major menu).

Sweep Rate Accuracy 1 ps/div

ăStep 30:ăAdjust the Signal Generator to the following settings:

Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 MHz

Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 V (1.4 V

pĆp

)

RMS

(Set for 1.000 ±0.004 V on screen.)

pĆp

ăStep 31:ăInvoke smoothing as follows:

WAVEFORM button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Sampling Head Fnc's (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Smoothing On (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Exit (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 32:ăAdjust the Main Size to 130 ps/div.

ăStep 33:ăAdjust the Main Pos to 55 ns.

ăStep 34:ăSet the Main Pos control (lower knob) so that the zero crossĆ

ing of the waveform occurs on the center graticule.

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 35:ăSet the horizontal reference point to Center as follows, so that

the waveform will be expanded around the horizontal center:

WAVEFORM button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Horizontal Desc (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Center (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 36:ăAdjust theVertical Sizeas follows:

Vertical icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Set Vert Size to 5 mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

ăStep 37:ăSet theMain Sizeas follows:

Horizontal icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Set Main Size to 1 ps/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

ăStep 38:ăTurn themainframeAverageon.

WAVEFORM button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Acquire Desc (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Average N (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Exit (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 39:ăActivatethecursors as follows:

Cursors icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 40:ăRead the Dv located in the major menu. Dv should bewithin

-28.3 mV and -23.1 mV, or within +23.1 mV and +28.3 mV, showing

that the sweep rate accuracy is within 10%.

ăStep 41:ăTouch Exit (in themajor menu).

4Ć38

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

This procedure verifies the correct operation and accuracy of the

CSA 803A's trigger system.

Triggering,

External Direct

Specifications

The specifications for triggering using the external trigger are as follows:

100 mV at 300 MHz

pĆp

100 mV at 1000 MHz

pĆp

100 mV at 3.0 GHz

pĆp

Setupto Check Triggering

SDĆ24

Sampling

Head

CH 1

2X Attenuators

CSA 803C

High Frequency

Sine Wave

Generator

Output

Trigger Input

50 W Coaxial Cables

Power Divider

Procedure to Check Triggering

ăStep1:ă Install the SDĆ24 Sampling Head into the position shown in the

setup diagram (CH 1/CH 2 slot). If the unit was in standby mode, set the

ON/STANDBY switch to ON.

ăStep2:ă Initialize the mainframe as follows:

UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (in verification popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep3:ă Adjust the high frequency generator to 400 mV at 300 MHz.

pĆp

ăStep4:ă On the Sampling Head, press the Channel 1 select button.

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 5:ăMake the following selections:

AUTOSET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Slightly adjust the Trigger Level (in Trigger major menu), if necessary

MEASURE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Measurement (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

PeakĆPeak (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

WAVEFORM button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Sampling Head Fnc's (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Smoothing On (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Exit (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 6:ăCheck waveform for stable triggering. Using AUTOSET, repeat

this procedure for the following frequency generator settings:

400 mV at 1000 MHz

pĆp

400 mV at 3.0 GHz

pĆp

4Ć40

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

This procedure verifies the correct operation and accuracy of the

CSA 803A's Prescaler trigger system.

Prescaler Triggering

Specifications

The specifications for Prescaler triggering are as follows:

800 mV at 2 GHz

pĆp

600 mV at 3 GHz

pĆp

600 mV at 10 GHz

pĆp

Setup to Check Prescaler Triggering

SDĆ22, SDĆ24, or SDĆ26

CH 1

CSA 803C

High Frequency Generator

Output

B10

Input

PRESCALER TRIGGER Input

Power Meter

Sensor

Input

Power

Reference

Picosecond Pulse

Labs5520A

10X PickĆoff

10 GHz Power

Meter Sensor

Procedure to Check Prescaler Triggering

ăStep 1:ăInstall the SDĆ24 Sampling Head into the CH 1/CH 2 slot of the

mainframe. Set the ON/STANDBY switch to ON and let the instrument

warm up for approximately 15 minutes. Initialize the mainframe settings,

then perform the following settings and steps.

ăStep 2:ăConnect the High Frequency Generator to the Picosecond

Pulse Labs (PSPL) 10X PickĆoff IN. Connect the PSPL ꢀ 10 output to

Channel 1 of the Sampling Head.

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 3:ăConnect the PSPL X1 output to the power meter/sensor (meter/

sensor must be calibrated). Set the Generator frequency to 2 GHz.

Adjust the Generator output until the power meter reads:

2.0 dBm (800 mV ). Use correction factors for the sensor.

pĆp

ăStep 4:ăConnect the PSPL X1 output to the CSA 803A Prescaler Trigger

input.

ăStep 5:ăCSA 803A mainframe settings:

DefTra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Select Channel 1, M1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

TRIGGER button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

External Prescaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Horizontal (

) icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Adjust MainSize to 200 ps/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

Vertical ( ) icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Adjust MainSize to 10 mV/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

ăStep 6:ăTurn AVG ON. Check display for stable triggering. Then turn the

AVG OFF.

ăStep 7:ăRepeat steps 3, 4, 5 and 6 for the following settings:

TableĂ4Ć6:ăPrescaler Test Settings

Generator Freq

Power Reading

MainSize

Vert Size

3 GHz

-0.458 dBm

(600 mV

50 ps/div

10 mV/div

)

pĆp

10 GHz

-0.458 dBm

(600 mV

50 ps/div

10 mV/div

)

pĆp

4Ć42

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

This procedure verifies the correct operation and accuracy of the

CSA 803A's Internal Clock signal.

Internal Clock

MeasurementLimits

The measurement limits of the internal clock pulse are as follows:

rise time v2.5 ns

frequency of 100 kHz ±3% accuracy

duty cycle 50% ±3%

Setup to Examine Internal Clock

CH 1

CSA 803C

12I RF Cable

Internal Clock Output

Procedure to Examine Internal Clock

ăStep 1:ăInstall the SDĆ24 Sampling Head into the position shown in the

setup diagram (CH 1/CH 2 slot). If the unit was in standby mode, set the

ON/STANDBYswitch to ON.

ăStep 2:ăInitialize the mainframe as follows:

UTILITYbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (in verification popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 3:ăTrigger the CSA 803C as follows:

TRIGGER Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Source (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Clock

ăStep 4:ăOn the Sampling Head, press the Channel 1 select button.

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 5:ăSet up the CSA 803C as follows:

UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Instrument Options (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Edge Mode (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 6:ăOn the CSA 803C, press the AUTOSET button.

ăStep 7:ăCheck the rise time as follows:

MEASURE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Measurements (in the major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Rise (in the popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Check that Rise is v2.5 ns.

Exit Menu (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 8:ăChange the sweep rate as follows:

Horizontal (

) icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Adjust Main Size to 5 ms/div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust upper knob

ăStep 9:ăCheck the frequency as follows:

MEASURE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Measurements (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Frequency (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Duty Cycle (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Check that the frequency is between 97 kHz and 103 kHz

(100 kHz ±3%).

Check that the Duty Cycle is between 47% and 53% (50% ±3%).

Exit Menu (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

4Ć44

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

This procedure verifies the correct operation and accuracy of the

CSA 803A's Calibrator.

Calibrator Output

Measurement Limits

The measurement limits of the calibrator are as follows:

amplitude 250 mV±15%

rise time ≈250Ăps

Setup toExamine Calibrator

CH 1

CSA 803C

12I RF Cable

Calibrator Output

Procedure to Examine Calibrator

ăStep 1:ăInstall the SDĆ24 Sampling Head into the position shown in the

setup diagram (CH 1/CH 2 slot). If the unit was in standby mode, set the

ON/STANDBY switch to ON.

ăStep 2:ăInitialize the mainframe as follows:

UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (in verification popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 3:ăTrigger the CSA 803C as follows:

TRIGGER Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Source (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Touch

Internal Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Touch

ăStep 4:ăOn the Sampling Head, press the Channel 1 select button.

ăStep 5:ăSet up the CSA 803C as follows:

UTILITY Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Instrument Options (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Touch

Edge Mode (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Touch

CSA 803C Service Manual

4Ć45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Performance Tests

ăStep 6:ăOn the CSA 803C, press the AUTOSET button.

ăStep 7:ăCheck the peakĆtoĆpeak amplitude as follows:

MEASURE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Measurements (in the major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

PeakĆPeak (in the popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Rise (in the popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Rise (in the major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Proximal (in the popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Adjust Proximal for 20% and Distal for 80%.

Check that peakĆtoĆpeak amplitude is within 212.5 mV and 287.5 mV

(250 mV ±15%).

Check that rise time is approximately 250Ăps.

4Ć46

Performance Verification

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

This section contains procedures to checkelectrical specifications, to exĆ

amine measurement limits, and to manually set all internal adjustments

listed in Table 5Ć1. Use these procedures to return the CSA 803C to speciĆ

fied operation following repair or as part of a comprehensive performance

test procedure to verify that the CSA 803C meets specifications. To adjust

the CSA 803C, simply perform the procedures listed in this section. The

Measurement Limits are given at the beginning of each procedure. FunctionĆ

al tests are included in the Performance Verification section. Refer to the

CSA 803C Communications Signal Analyzer User Manual for more informaĆ

tion about specifications and CSA 803C operation. The Setup in each proceĆ

dure provides information concerning test equipment setup or

interconnection. Refer to Table 5Ć2 for more information concerning test

equipment used in the setups.

Most Adjustment and Performance Verification procedures can be run in any

order. However, the Sampling Head Calibration must always precede other

procedures which use an operational sampling head. Also, if different samĆ

pling heads are used, then sampling head calibration is required for each

additional sampling head.

CSA 803C Service Manual

5Ć1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

TableĂ5Ć1:ăMeasurement Limits and Adjustments

Procedure Description

Measurement

Limits (Examine)

Adjustments

(Adjust)

Power Supply

Voltage Supply

Voltage Reference

Regulator Reference

Display

+4.85 V to +5.25 V

+5.15 V to +5.25 V

+9.95 Vto +10.05 V

none

R800 +5.2 V Ref for +5.20 V

R730 +10 VRef for +10.00 V

Cutoff

visible

SCREEN, on transformer on A8

CRT Driver board, until display

appears

Convergence

primary colors are not separated

in the white grid

CONVERGENCE, R210, for

optimum convergence of red,

green, and blue.

Focus

focused grid pattern

align with tic marks

FOCUS, on transformer on A8

CRT Driver board, for optimum

focus on white grid pattern.

Vertical Size and Position

VERT SIZE, L321; and VERT POS,

R311; for optimum alignment

Horizontal Size, Linearity and

Position

align with tic marks and for

optimum appearance

HĆSIZE, R501; HĆLIN, R502; and

HĆPOS, R500; for optimum

alignment and linearity

Gray Scale

white at the top of the display,

gray at the bottom, and the right

side of the display is cut off

SCREEN, on transformer on A8

CRT Driver board; RED, R200;

GREEN, R201; and BLUE, R203,

for cutoff and color balance

Color Impurity

no severe color impurities in red,

green, and blue display

cycle power on and off

Real Time Clock

1,000,000 ms ±5 ms

Real Time Clock for 1,000,000 ms

5Ć2

Adjustment Procedures

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

Table 5Ć2 (Test Equipment), contains suggested test equipment for use in

Test Equipment

this section. Procedure steps are based on the test equipment examples

given, but you may substitute other equipment with similar specifications.

The use of different equipment may alter test results, setup information, and

related connectors and adapters.

TableĂ5Ć2:ăTest Equipment

Description

Minimum

Specification

Examples of Applicable

Test Equipment

Digital Voltmeter

(w/test leads)

v0.005% Accuracy FLUKE 8842A Digital Voltmeter

Frequency Counter One Part in

Tektronix DC 5010 Universal

1,000,000 Accuracy Counter/Timer with a

TM 5000ĆSeries Power Module

IBM compatible PC with

Test Terminal

any GPIB

(IEEEĆ1978) controlĆ terminal emulation software

ler, or ASCII termiĆ

nal equipped with

an RSĆ232ĆC port.

Requires compatĆ

ible RSĆ232ĆC serial

interface cable

Coaxial Cable, 50 W 50 W, 36Ćinch, male Tektronix Part 012-0482-00

(3 required)

BNC connectors

Coaxial Cable, RF

RF cable, 12 in.,

SMA connectors

Tektronix Part 174-1364-00

Tektronix Part 174-1120-00

RF cable, 8.5 in.,

SMA connectors

Adapters

BNC femaleĆtoĆmale Tektronix Part 103-0090-00

Dual Banana

BNC maleĆtoĆfemale Tektronix Part 103-0035-00

Dual Banana

SMA maleĆtoĆBNC

female (8 required)

Tektronix Part 015-1018-00

SMA femaleĆtoĆBNC Tektronix Part 013-0126-00

male

SMA maleĆtoĆN

male

Tektronix Part 015-0369-00

Attenuator, 10X

20 dB attenuation,

50 W, one male and

one female

Tektronix Part 011-0059-02

CSA 803C Service Manual

5Ć3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

TableĂ5Ć2:ăTestEquipment(Cont.)

Description

Minimum

Specification

Examples of Applicable

TestEquipment

Attenuator, 2X

50 W, SMA, one

male and one

female

Tektronix Part 015-1001-00

Power Supplies

Troubleshooting

Fixture

Tektronix 067-1264-00

Extended Diagnostics

11000ĆSeries Power Supplies

troubleshooting fixture

Probe, 10X

Attenuation 10X

Tektronix P6106A

Pickoff, 10X

Power Meter

Power Sensor

Alignment Tool

Picosecond Pulse Labs 5520A

HP 436A

HP 8485A

Plastic hex

Tektronix Part 003-0301-00

Tektronix Part 003-0675-01

Tektronix Part 003-1400-00

Insulated slot

Square Tip

(ceramic)

Magnetic ScrewĆ

driver

Holder for Torx

head tips

Tektronix Part 003-0293-00

Tektronix Part 003-0814-00

Torx Head ScrewĆ

driver

#10 tip

#15 tip

#20 tip

Tektronix Part 003-0966-00

Tektronix Part 003-0866-00

Tektronix Part 013-0198-00

External Loopback

Connector

RSĆ232ĆC connecĆ

tor

Shorting Strap

two alligator clips

on a short pigtail

conductor

Integrated Circuit

Extracting Tool

IC InsertionĆExtracĆ General Tool P/N U505BG or

tion Pliers, 28Ćpin

type

equivalent

5Ć4

Adjustment Procedures

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

TableĂ5Ć2:ăTest Equipment (Cont.)

Description

Minimum

Specification

Examples of Applicable

Test Equipment

Board Removal

Tools

StraightĆslot screwĆ

driver, large

TorxĆdrive screwĆ

driver,

TĆ7, TĆ8, TĆ10, TĆ15,

TĆ20, TĆ25

Allen (hex) Wrench,

1/16Ćinch

Nutdrivers,

3/16Ćinch, 1/4Ćinch,

7/16Ćinch

NeedleĆnose pliers

half inch rulings

Small Ruler

Antistatic wrist strap

Tektronix Part 006-3415-04

CSA 803C Service Manual

5Ć5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

Some procedures begin with a setup illustration that shows what test equipĆ

ment is needed and how to connect it. The other procedures require only a

calibrated SDĆSeries Sampling Head. Refer to Table 5Ć2 (Test Equipment) on

the preceding pages for an example of the test equipment for each proceĆ

dure.

Using These

Procedures

Conventions in this Manual

In these procedures, the following conventions are used:

CAPITAL letters within the body of text identify front panel controls,

indicators, and connectors on the CSA 803C (for example, MEASURE)

and sampling head.

Bold letters identify menu labels and display messages.

Initial Capital letters identify connectors, controls, and indicators (for

example, On) on associated test equipment.

In some steps, the first word is italicized to identify a step that contains a

performance verification and an adjustment instruction. For example, if

Check is the first word in the title of a step, an electrical specification is

checked. If Adjust appears in the title, the step involves an electrical

adjustment. If Examine is thefirst word in thetitle, thestep concerns

measurement limits that indicate whether the CSA 803C is operating

properly; these limits are not to be interpreted as electrical specificaĆ

tions.

Menu Selections and Measurement Techniques

Details on measurement techniques and instructions for making menu

selections are generally not included in these procedures. Comprehensive

descriptions of menus and CSA 803C features are located in the CSA 803C

Communications Signal Analyzer User Manual.

User Manual

Reviewing the CSA 803C Communications Signal Analyzer User Manual is

strongly recommended to familiarize the firstĆtime user with CSA 803C

controls and features.

5Ć6

Adjustment Procedures

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

This procedure shows the setup and lists the steps to examine the MeaĆ

sured Voltage Supply and to check and adjust the Voltage Reference and

the Regulator Reference (see Figures 5Ć1, 5Ć2, and 5Ć3).

Power Supply

This procedure should only be performed if the instrument is out of

measurement limits and maintenance is required. If the CSA 803C is

already within limits, proceed to the Display adjustment procedure.

Measurement Limits

The measurement limits for this procedure are as follows:

Measured Voltage Supply limits must be within +4.85 V and +5.25 V

Voltage Reference must be within +5.15 V and +5.25 V

Regulator Reference must be within +9.95 V and +10.05 V

Setup to Examine Voltage Supply

CSA 803C

Digital Voltmeter

Low

TP200 (VCC) and

To +5 V

TP300 (GND) on A18

Memory Board

(see Figure 5Ć1)

To Ground

Procedure to Examine Voltage Supply

ăStep 1:ăSet the CSA 803C ON/STANDBY switch to ON, and initialize as

follows:

UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (in verification popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 2:ăWith the CSA 803C top and bottom covers removed, refer to

Section 3 and locate the A18 Memory circuit board.

ăStep 3:ăConnect the digital multimeter to TP200 and TP300 as indicated

in the setup illustration (see also Figure 5Ć1).

CSA 803C Service Manual

5Ć7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

ăStep 4:ăCheck that the Digital Voltmeter reads within the limits of

+4.85 V and +5.25 V.

TP200 VCC TP300 GND

P106

(To A13 Mother

Board Connector)

Front of Oscilloscope

LithiumBattery

(BT150)

Figure 5Ć1:ăA18 Memory Board Test Point Locations

5Ć8

Adjustment Procedures

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

Setup to Examine/Adjust Voltage Reference

CSA 803C

Digital Voltmeter

Low

A2A2 Control

Rectifier Board

(see Figure 5Ć2)

To TP701

To TP221

This procedure should only be performed if maintenance is required.

This is not necessary for verifying instrument specifications.

Procedure to Examine/Adjust Voltage Reference

ăStep 1:ăPerform the following settings in the order listed:

a. Set the front panel ON/STANDBYswitch to STANDBYand the rear

panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF. Disconnect the CSA

803C from the power source.

b. Remove the Power Supply module following the procedure listed

under Power Supply Module Removal/Replacement in the MainteĆ

nance Section.

c. Create a short between test points TP830 and TP831 on the A2A2

Control Rectifier board using a shorting strap. See Figure 5Ć2.

d. Connect the CSA 803C Power Supply module to a suitable line powĆ

er source.

e. Set the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to ON.

ăStep 2:ăWith the Digital Voltmeter set to DC Voltage and connected as

indicated in the setup diagram, check that the multimeter reads within

the limits of +5.15 V and +5.25 V.

DO NOT attempt to change the following adjustment setting if the

reading is within the stated limits. Instead, proceed to Step 4.

WARNING

To prevent electric shock, use extreme caution when making the

following adjustment.

CSA 803C Service Manual

5Ć9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

ăStep3:ă Adjust the +5.2 V Ref, R800, on the A2A2 Control Rectifier

board to +5.20 V.

ăStep4:ă Remove the Digital Voltmeter leads from the test points.

ăStep5:ă Set the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF.

ăStep6:ă Disconnect the CSA 803C from the power source.

ăStep7:ă Remove all test leads and the TP830/831 shorting strap.

ăStep8:ă Replace the Power Supply module using the instructions in the

Maintenance Section.

ăStep9:ă Set the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to ON, and the

front panel ON/STANDBY switch to ON.

R800

+5.2 V

REF

TP701

TP221

TP831

TP830

Figure 5Ć2:ăA2A2 Control Rectifier Board Test Point and Adjustment Locations

5Ć10

Adjustment Procedures

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

Setup to Examine/Adjust Regulator Reference

CSA 803C

Digital Voltmeter

Low

To Ref

Test Point

Regulator

Board

To Com

Test Point

(see Figure 5Ć3)

Procedure to Examine/Adjust Regulator Reference

ăStep 1:ăMake the connections shown in the setup and Figure 5Ć3 diaĆ

grams. Check that the CSA 803C power is ON.

ăStep 2:ăWith the Digital Voltmeter in DC Voltage mode, check the VoltĆ

meter for a reading within the limits of +9.95 V and +10.05 V.

DO NOT attempt to make the following adjustment to R730 if the

reading is within the stated limits. Instead, proceed to Step 4.

WARNING

To prevent electric shock, use extreme caution when making the

following adjustment. Access the test points from the right side of

the oscilloscope.

ăStep 3:ăAdjust the +10 V Ref, R730, on the A4 Regulator board to

+10.00 V.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the test leads.

ăStep 5:ăInitiate PowerĆOn Diagnostics (see Performance Verification

section).

CSA 803C Service Manual

5Ć11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

Com Test

Point

Ref Test

Point

R730

+10 V Ref

Figure 5Ć3:ăA4 Regulator Board Test Point and Adjustment Locations

5Ć12

Adjustment Procedures

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

This procedure shows the setup and lists the steps to examine and adjust

the A7 CRT Socket board and the A8 CRT Driver board (see Figures 5Ć4 and

5Ć5).

Display

The adjustments in this procedure only affect the visual aspects of

the CRT display and you should only perform these adjustments

when the CRT, A7 CRT Socket board, or A8 CRT Driver board comĆ

ponents are replaced. These adjustments do not affect CSA 803C

accuracy since all measurements are made on the acquired data,

not the displayed data. Unless alignment or brightness difficulties

are apparent, proceed to the Real Time Clock adjustment proceĆ

dure.

For all Examine steps in this procedure, if the display parameter examined is

within the stated limits, then do not perform the Adjust step following that

Examine step. Instead, proceed to the step following the Adjust step.

Measurement Limits

The measurement limits are set on the CRT as follows:

The display must be visible (not cut off).

The red, green, and blue traces must not be separated.

Focus is adjusted for minimum line width.

Vertical size is adjusted to align the corners of the grid pattern with the

tic marks on the edges of the front panel bezel.

Horizontal size is adjusted to align the corners of the grid pattern with

the tic marks on the top and bottom edges of the front panel bezel, and

the horizontal linearity is adjusted for uniform grid box length.

Horizontal linearity is adjusted for optimum appearance using an interĆ

nally generated grid pattern.

Red, green, and blue colors must have optimum white to gray scale

linearity.

Red Display, Green Disply, and Blue Display in Extended Diagnostics

must not contain severe color impurities.

CSA 803C Service Manual

5Ć13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

Setup to Examine/Adjust the Display

CSA 803C

Procedure to Examine/Adjust the Display

WARNING

To prevent electric shock, use extreme caution when performing

the following adjustment.

ăStep 1:ăPerform the following settings in the order listed:

CSA 803C

ON/STANDBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STANDBY

ăStep 2:ăRemove the top and bottom cabinet panel covers.

ăStep 3:ăRemove the three screws that secure the CRT cover, and then

remove the cover.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the two screws that secure the cover that shields the

A7 CRT Socket board (CRT Socket board cover).

ăStep 5:ăSet the ON/STANDBY switch to ON.

ăStep 6:ăExamine that the display is visible.

ăStep 7:ăAdjust SCREEN, located on the transformer mounted to the A8

CRT Driver board, clockwise until the display appears.

ăStep 8:ăPress the UTILITY button.

ăStep 9:ăTouch Extended Diagnostic, then touch Extended Diagnostic

in the Verify Diagnostics popĆup menu.

ăStep 10:ăTouch Block and then Front Panel.

ăStep 11:ăTouch Area and then Test Pattern.

ăStep 12:ăTouch Routine and then White Grid.

5Ć14

Adjustment Procedures

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

ăStep13:ă Touch Run in the major menu.

ăStep14:ă Examine that the primary colors (red, green, and blue) are not

separated in the white grid pattern.

WARNING

To prevent electric shock, do not touch the back side of the A7 CRT

Socket board. Use extreme caution when performing the following

adjustment.

ăStep15:ă Adjust CONVERGENCE, R210, on the A7 CRT Socket board

for the optimum vertical convergence of the red, green, and blue colors.

ăStep16:ă Examine that the grid pattern is focused.

ăStep17:ă Adjust FOCUS, located on the transformer mounted on the A8

CRT Driver board, for the optimum focus of the white grid pattern.

ăStep18:ă Examine that the grid is aligned with the top and bottom tic

marks along the inside vertical edge of the front panel bezel. To elimiĆ

nate any parallax error, look directly ahead at the CRT, and then align

the top of the grid with the top vertical tic mark and the bottom of the

grid with the bottom tic mark.

ăStep19:ă Adjust VERT SIZE, L321, and VERT POS, R311, on the A8 CRT

Driver board to align the grid with the tic marks along the inside vertical

edge of the front panel bezel.

ăStep20:ă Examine that the grid is aligned with the horizontal tic marks at

the top and bottom of the front panel bezel and that the grid boxes are

of uniform length throughout the grid pattern.

ăStep21:ă Adjust H SIZE, R501; H LIN, R502; and H POS, R500; on the

A8 CRT Driver board for the best overall linearity and position. Use the

horizontal tic marks at the top and bottom of the front panel bezel to

align the grid.

ăStep22:ă HĆSIZE, HĆLIN, and HĆPOS potentiometers interact, so you

may need to repeat Steps 20 and 21 until they are all correctly adjusted.

ăStep23:ă Touch Exit to return to the Routine menu of the Extended

Diagnostic menu structure.

ăStep24:ă Touch Gray Scale in the Routine menu.

ăStep25:ă Touch Run in the major menu.

CSA 803C Service Manual

5Ć15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

ăStep26:ă Examine that the color scale is white at the top, gray at the

bottom, andthe backgroundon the right side of the display is cut off

(that is, the vertical raster lines are not visible on the right side of the

display).

If the gray scale meets the previous conditions, do not perform the

adjustments in Steps 27, 28, and30. Proceedto Step 31.

ăStep27:ă Adjust RED, R200; GREEN, R201; andBLUE, R203; on the A7

CRT Socket boardfully counterclockwise.

ăStep28:ă Adjust SCREEN, locatedon the transformer that is mounted

on the A8 CRT Driver board, so that the bottom block of the gray scale

is visible but the background on the right side of the display is still cut

off.

ăStep29:ă Note which color (red, green, or blue) appears most promiĆ

nently in the display. DO NOT adjust this color in the following step.

ăStep30:ă Adjust RED, R200; GREEN, R201; or BLUE, R203; on the A7

CRT Socket board for a pure white to gray scale display. Only adjust the

colors that do not appear to be prominent. For example, if the display

appears to be more red, then adjust the GREEN and BLUE potentiomeĆ

ters.

NOTE

SCREEN mayhave to be adjusted slightlyif anyof the colors are

adjusted. If the vertical raster lines are visible in the background,

then adjust SCREEN so that the background is just cut off, but the

bottom graybox is still visible.

ăStep31:ă Touch Exit to return to the Extended Diagnostic menu strucĆ

ture.

ăStep32:ă Touch Red Display, andthen touch Run.

ăStep33:ă Examine the reddisplay for any severe color impurities.

ăStep34:ă Touch Exit to return to the Extended Diagnostics menu

structure.

ăStep35:ă Touch Green Disply andthen touch Run.

ăStep36:ă Examine the green display for any severe color impurities.

ăStep37:ă Touch Exit to return to the Extended Diagnostic menu strucĆ

ture.

ăStep38:ă Touch Blue Display andthen touch Run.

ăStep39:ă Examine the blue display for any severe color impurities.

5Ć16

Adjustment Procedures

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

ăStep 40:ăIf any of the color displays (that is, the Red Display, Green

Disply, or Blue Display) showed severe color impurities, then perform

the followingto restore the color purity:

Ensure that the CSA 803C environment is free of all external magĆ

netic fields. For example, a magnetic screwdriver near the CSA

803C could cause color impurities on the screen.

Set the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY.

Wait 10 seconds, then set the ON/STANDBY switch to ON.

Examine the color displays again, and verify that the color impurities

are removed.

NOTE

When the CSA 803C is moved in the earth's magnetic field, color

impurities will appear on the display. This is normal. To remove the

impurity, repeat Step 40.

ăStep 41:ăSet the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY.

ăStep 42:ăReplace the CRT Socket board cover and the CRT cover.

CSA 803C Service Manual

5Ć17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

FOCUS

SCREEN

VERTICAL POS

R311

HĆPOS

R500

HĆSIZE

R501

HĆLIN

R502

VERT SIZE

L321

Figure 5Ć4:ăA8 CRT Driver Board Adjustment Locations

5Ć18

Adjustment Procedures

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

GREEN

R201

RED

R200

BLUE

R203

CONVERGENCE

R210

Figure 5Ć5:ăA7 CRT Socket Board Adjustment Locations

CSA 803C Service Manual

5Ć19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

This procedure verifies the correct operation and accuracy of the

CSA 803A's input/output systems (see Figure 5Ć6).

Real Time Clock

This procedure should be performed only if maintenance is required.

Its use is not necessary for verifying instrument specifications.

MeasurementLimits

The measurement limit for the real time clock is 1,000,000 ms ±5 ms.

Setup to Examine/Adjust Real Time Clock

CH 1

CSA 803C

Frequency

Counter

10X Probe

To TP310

A14

I/O Board

(see Figure 5Ć6)

To Ground

TestPoint

Procedure to Examine/Adjust Real Time Clock

ăStep 1:ăInitialize the CSA 803C settings as follows:

UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Initialize (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Initialize (in verification popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

5Ć20

Adjustment Procedures

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

ăStep 2:ăPerform the following operations in the order given:

Set the front panel ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY.

Remove the L bracket on the front of the card cage.

Remove both plastic retaining strips from the top of card cage.

Remove the A17 Main Processor board, and then install it in the

fourth slot from the outer edge.

Remove the A29 Memory Expansion board, and then install it in the

third slot.

Remove the A14 Input/Output (I/O) board, and then install it in the

second slot.

Move the A18 Memory board from the first slot to the fifth slot.

Reconnect all the cables to the A14 I/O board.

Set the CSA 803C front panel ON/STANDBY switch to ON.

ăStep 3:ăConnect the Frequency Counter as indicated in the setup

diagram (see also Figure 5Ć6), and set the controls as follows:

Frequency counter

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Period

Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC

Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - (negative)

Time Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz

ăStep 4:ăMake the following CSA 803C selections:

UTILITY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press

Page to Enhanced Accuracy (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Page to Utility2 (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Extended Diagnostics (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Extended Diagnostics (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Block (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Input/Output (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Area (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Real Time Clk (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Routine (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Calibrate (in popĆup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

Run (in major menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch

ăStep 5:ăExamine that the frequency counter reads within the limits of

999,995 ms and 1,000,005 ms.

DO NOT attempt to optimize the adjustment setting if the period is

within the stated limits. Proceed to Step 7.

ăStep 6:ăAdjust Real Time Clock, C510, for 1,000,000 ms.

CSA 803C Service Manual

5Ć21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustments

ăStep 7:ăRemove the frequency counter from the power module.

ăStep 8:ăSet the CSA 803C ON/STANDBY switch toSTANDBY.

ăStep 9:ăReplace the circuit boards (rearranged in Step 2) in their origiĆ

nal positions.

C510

Real Time

Clock

TP31

Ground

Figure 5Ć6:ăA14 I/O Board Test Point and Adjustment Locations

5Ć22

Adjustment Procedures

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preventive Maintenance

Regular maintenance can prevent instrument breakdown and may improve

the reliability of the instrument. The environment in which the instrument

operates will determine the frequency of maintenance. A convenient time for

doing preventive maintenance is prior to performing an electrical adjustĆ

ment.

Removing the

Cabinet Panel

WARNING

Dangerous potentials exist at several points throughout this instruĆ

ment. When the instrument is operated with the covers removed, to

avoid electric shock, do not touch exposed connections or compoĆ

nents.

Some transistors have voltages present on their cases. Therefore,

to avoid electric shock, disconnect the power before cleaning the

instrument or replacing any parts.

The top and bottom cabinet panels (or covers) protect you from operating

potentials present within the instrument. In addition, the panels reduce

radiation of electromagnetic interference from the instrument. To remove the

panels, loosen the fasteners and lift the panels off. Operate the instrument

with the panels in place to protect the interior from dust.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preventive Maintenance

The instrument should be cleaned as often as operating conditions require.

Dirt in the instrument can cause overheating and component breakdown.

Dirt on components acts as an insulating blanket and prevents efficient heat

dissipation. Dirt also provides an electrical conduction path which may

cause the instrument to fail. The side panels reduce the amount of dust that

reaches the interior of the instrument. Keep the side panels in place for

safety and cooling.

Cleaning the

Instrument

CAUTION

Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which might damage the

plastics used in this instrument. Use a nonresidue type of cleaner,

preferably isopropyl alcohol or totally denatured ethyl alcohol.

Before using any other type of cleaner, consult your local Tektronix

service center or representative.

Exterior

Dust on the instrument can be removed with a soft cloth or small brush. The

brush is also useful for dislodging dirt on and around the front panel conĆ

trols. Dirt that remains can be removed with a soft cloth dampened in a mild

detergent and water solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners.

CRT

Faceplates are cleaned with a soft, lintĆfree cloth dampened with denatured

alcohol.

6Ć2

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preventive Maintenance

Interior

Cleaning should seldom be necessary. To clean the interior, blow off the

dust with dry, lowĆvelocity air (approximately 5 lb/in@). Remove any dirt that

remains with a soft brush or a cloth dampened with a mild detergent and

water solution. A cottonĆtipped applicator is useful for cleaning in narrow

spaces, or for cleaning more delicate circuit components. After cleaning,

use a washcloth dampened with water to remove any residue.

CAUTION

Circuit boards and components must be dry before applying power

to prevent damage from electrical arcing.

The highĆvoltage circuits should receive special attention. ExcesĆ

sive dirt in these circuits may cause highĆvoltage arcing and result

in improper instrument operation.

The instrument should be inspected occasionally for defects such as broken

connections, improperly seated semiconductors, damaged or improperly

installed circuit boards, and heatĆdamaged parts. The corrective procedure

for most visible defects is obvious; however, particular care must be taken if

heatĆdamaged parts are found. Since overheating usually indicates other

trouble in the instrument, correcting the cause of overheating is important to

prevent the damage from reoccurring.

Visual Inspection

To ensure accurate measurements, check the electrical adjustment of this

instrument after each 2,000 hours of operation, or every 24 months if used

infrequently.

Periodic Electrical

Adjustment

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preventive Maintenance

6Ć4

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Corrective maintenance consists of module and board replacement proceĆ

dure for repairing the instrument.

Use caution if working near any metalĆfaced part in the Power Supply modĆ

ule.

Power Supply Voltage

Hazard

WARNING

All metal components, including any metalĆfaced ones, in the

Power Supply module should be considered hazardous because

these components may be at the AC line voltage potential.

Always remove the line power cord before attempting any disasĆ

sembly procedures.

An electricĆshock hazard exists when the instrument is not

grounded. Do not remove the ground wire (greenĆyellow) that

connects the Power Supply module chassis to the instrument.

When ordering replacement parts from Tektronix, Inc., include the following

information:

Ordering Parts

instrument type

instrument serial number

a description of the part

Tektronix part number

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

StaticĆSensitive

Device Classification

CAUTION

Static discharge can damage any semiconductor component in this

instrument. Follow the precautions in this section to prevent damĆ

age.

This instrument contains electrical components that are susceptible to

damage from static discharge. See Table 6Ć1 for the relative susceptibility of

various classes of semiconductors. Static voltages of 1 kV to 30 kV are

common in unprotected environments.

TableĂ6Ć1:ăRelative Susceptibility to Damage from Static Discharge

Semiconductor Classes

Relative

Susceptibility

Levels

MOS or CMOS microcircuits, and discrete or linear

microcircuits with MOS inputs (most sensitive)

100 V to 500 V

ECL

200 V to 500 V

250 V

Schottky signal diodes

Schottky TTL

500 V

HighĆfrequency bipolar transistors

JFETs

400 V to 600 V

600 V to 800 V

Linear microcircuits

400 V to 1000 V

(est.)

LowĆpower Schottky TTL

TTL (least sensitive)

900 V

1200 V

!Voltage discharged from a 100 pF capacitor through a resistance of 100 W.

6Ć6

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage:

Minimize handling of staticĆsensitive components.

Transport and store staticĆsensitive components or assemblies in their

original containers, antiĆstatic tube rail, or conductive foam. Label any

package that contains staticĆsensitive assemblies or components.

Discharge the static voltage from your body by wearing a wrist strap

while handling these components. Servicing staticĆsensitive assemblies

or components should be performed only at a staticĆfree work station by

qualified service personnel. We recommend using the static control mat,

Refer to Table 4Ć2 for the part numbers of these test equipment.

Keepthe work station surface free of anything that can generate or hold

a static charge.

Keep the component leads shorted together whenever possible by

storing them in conductive foam or rails.

Pick upcomponents by the body, never by the leads.

Do not slide the components over any surface.

Avoid handling components in areas that have a floor or workĆsurface

covering that can generate a static charge.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Use Table 6Ć2 as a convenient reference for finding connector and screw

locations when removing and replacing field replaceable units (FRUs). The

first column in the table lists the FRU to be removed or replaced, and the

second column lists the figures that you should reference for the location of

connector and screw locations discussed in the procedure to remove/reĆ

place this FRU.

Removing and

Replacing FRUs

TableĂ6Ć2:ăFRU Removal/Replacement Figure Cross Reference

FRU to be Removed/ Figures to Reference During Removal

Replaced

Page

Power Supply Module

Figure 6Ć2

Removing the Power Supply Rear Plate, Fan Housing,

and Rear Panel Connector Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć16

Figure 6Ć3

Figure 6Ć2

A2A2 Control Rectifier Board Connectors Locations . . . . . . . 6Ć17

Fan Motor

Removing the Power Supply Rear Plate, Fan Housing,

and Rear Panel Connector Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć16

Cathode Ray Tube (CRT)

Figure 6Ć5

Figure 6Ć12

Figure 6Ć15

Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć24

Removing/Replacing the A8 CRT Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć39

Removing/Replacing the A10 Front Panel

Button Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć43

Figure 6Ć32

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

Acquisition Unit

Figure 6Ć23

Figure 6Ć26

Figure 6Ć32

Removing/Replacing the A19 Strobe/TDR

Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć58

Removing/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć62

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

Batteries

Figure 6Ć10

Removing/Replacing the A5 Time Base/

Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć36

Figure 6Ć19

Figure 6Ć22

Removing/Replacing the A14 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć50

Removing/Replacing the A18 Memory Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć56

A1 Mainframe (M/F) Strobe

Drive Board

Figure 6Ć8

Removing/Replacing the A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board . . . . . . 6Ć31

Figure 6Ć32

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A3 Mainframe (M/F) Power

Connect Board

Figure 6Ć2

Removing the Power Supply Rear Plate, Fan Housing,

and Rear Panel Connector Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć16

Figure 6Ć3

Figure 6Ć9

Figure 6Ć10

A2A2 Control Rectifier Board Connectors Locations . . . . . . . 6Ć17

Removing/Replacing the A4 Regulator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć34

Removing/Replacing the A5 Time Base/

Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć36

Figure 6Ć19

Figure 6Ć23

Removing/Replacing the A14 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć50

Removing/Replacing the A19 Strobe/TDR

Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć58

6Ć8

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

TableĂ6Ć2:ăFRU Removal/Replacement Figure Cross Reference (Cont.)

FRU to be Removed/ Figures to Reference During Removal

Replaced

Page

A4 Regulator Board

Figure 6Ć2

Removing the Power Supply Rear Plate, Fan Housing,

and Rear Panel Connector Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć16

A2A2 Control Rectifier Board Connectors Locations . . . . . . . 6Ć17

Removing/Replacing the A4 Regulator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć34

Figure 6Ć3

Figure 6Ć9

Figure 6Ć32

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A5 Time Base/Controller

Board

Figure 6Ć10

Figure 6Ć32

Removing/Replacing the A5 Time Base/

Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć36

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A6 Calibrator Board

Figure 6Ć10

Removing/Replacing the A5 Time Base/

Controller Board (Steps 1 and 2 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć36

A7 CRT Socket Board

Figure 6Ć11

Figure 6Ć32

Removing/Replacing the A7 CRT Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć38

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A8 CRT Driver Board

Figure 6Ć5

Figure 6Ć12

Figure 6Ć15

Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć24

Removing/Replacing the A8 CRT Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć39

Removing/Replacing the A10 Front Panel

Button Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć43

Figure 6Ć32

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A9 Touch Panel Assembly

Figure 6Ć5

Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć24

Figure 6Ć15

Removing/Replacing the A10 Front Panel

Button Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć43

Figure 6Ć32

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A10 Front Panel Control

Board

Figure 6Ć5

Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć24

Figure 6Ć15

Removing/Replacing the A10 Front Panel

Button Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć43

Figure 6Ć32

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A11 Front Panel Button

Board

Figure 6Ć5

Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć24

Figure 6Ć15

Removing/Replacing the A10 Front Panel

Button Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć43

Figure 6Ć16

Figure 6Ć32

Removing/Replacing the A11 Front Panel

Button Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć44

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A12 Rear Panel Assembly

Figure 6Ć5

Figure 6Ć17

Figure 6Ć32

Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć24

Removing/Replacing the A12 Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . 6Ć46

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

TableĂ6Ć2:ăFRU Removal/ReplacementFigure Cross Reference (Cont.)

FRU to be Removed/

Replaced

Figures to Reference During Removal

Page

A13 Mother Board

Figure 6Ć7

Figure 6Ć18

Figure 6Ć19

Figure 6Ć32

Top View of the Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć30

Removing/Replacing the A13 Mother Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć48

Removing/Replacing the A14 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć50

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A14 Input/Output (I/O)

Board

Figure 6Ć7

Figure 6Ć19

Figure 6Ć32

Top View of the Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć30

Removing/Replacing the A14 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć50

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A15 Memory Manager Unit

(MMU) Board

Figure 6Ć7

Figure 6Ć19

Figure 6Ć20

Figure 6Ć32

Top View of the Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć30

Removing/Replacing the A14 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć50

Removing/Replacing the A15 MMU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć52

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A17 Main Processor Board

Figure 6Ć7

Top View of the Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć30

Figure 6Ć21

Removing/Replacing the A17 Main

Processor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć54

Figure 6Ć32

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A18 Memory Board

Figure 6Ć7

Top View of the Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć30

Removing/Replacing the A18 Memory Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć56

Figure 6Ć22

A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer

Board

Figure 6Ć23

Figure 6Ć26

Figure 6Ć32

Removing/Replacing the A19 Strobe/TDR

Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć58

Removing/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć62

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A20/A21 Head Interconnect Figure 6Ć23

(Power Only) and

Removing/Replacing the A19 Strobe/TDR

Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć58

A22/A23 Head Interconnect

Boards

Figure 6Ć24

Removing/Replacing the A20/A21 Head Interconnect

(Power Only) and the A22/A23 Head Interconnect Boards . . 6Ć60

Figure 6Ć25

Figure 6Ć26

Removing/Replacing the Front Subpanel Assembly . . . . . . . 6Ć61

Removing/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć62

Figure 6Ć28

Removing/Replacing the A24 Acquisition

Analog Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć64

Figure 6Ć29

Figure 6Ć32

Removing/Replacing the A28 Acquisition MPU Board . . . . . . 6Ć65

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

6Ć10

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

TableĂ6Ć2:ăFRU Removal/Replacement Figure Cross Reference (Cont.)

FRU to be Removed/ Figures to Reference During Removal

Replaced

Page

A26 Mainframe (M/F)

Acquisition Interconnect

Board

Figure 6Ć23

Removing/Replacing the A19 Strobe/TDR

Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć58

Figure 6Ć25

Figure 6Ć26

Removing/Replacing the Front Subpanel Assembly . . . . . . . 6Ć61

Removing/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć62

Figure 6Ć27

Figure 6Ć28

Top View of the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect Board . . . 6Ć63

Removing/Replacing the A24 Acquisition

Analog Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć64

Figure 6Ć29

Figure 6Ć32

Removing/Replacing the A28 Acquisition MPU Board . . . . . . 6Ć65

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A27 Acquisition Analog

Board

Figure 6Ć23

Figure 6Ć26

Figure 6Ć28

Figure 6Ć32

Removing/Replacing the A19 Strobe/TDR

Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć58

Removing/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć62

Removing/Replacing the A24 Acquisition

Analog Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć64

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

A28 Acquisition MPU Board Figure 6Ć23

Figure 6Ć26

Removing/Replacing the A19 Strobe/TDR

Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć58

Removing/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć62

Figure 6Ć29

Figure 6Ć32

Removing/Replacing the A28 Acquisition MPU Board . . . . . . 6Ć65

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

Firmware ICs

Figure 6Ć30

Figure 6Ć32

FRU IC Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć68

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

Serial Data Interface (SDI)

Figure 6Ć19

Figure 6Ć32

Removing/Replacing the A14 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć50

MultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor

Indexing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć74

Figure 6Ć31

Figure 6Ć37

IC InsertionĆExtraction Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć71

Fuses

Fuse Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć105

NOTE

In addition to the figures listed in Table 6Ć2, the explodedĆview

drawings in the Parts List section may be helpful in removing or

disassembling individual FRUs or subassemblies. Also, Figures 6Ć1

and 6Ć30 are useful for determining the location of FRUs and

FRU ICs.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

The top and/or bottom covers will need to be removed for most repairs. To

loosen the cover fasteners, use a coin or a straightĆslot screwdriver with a

largeĆsized tip and rotate the cover fasteners a quarter turn counterĆclockĆ

wise.

Whenever a specific area is mentioned (such as the right side), it will usually

be in reference to the front of the instrument. If another reference is inĆ

tended, it will be indicated (for example, viewing from the left side or viewing

from the rear of the instrument).

All connector names are labeled on the circuit board and/or on the connecĆ

tors themselves.

WARNING

To avoid electricĆshock hazard and instrument damage, always

disconnect the CSA 803C from its power source before removing

or replacing FRUs. For sampling head removal or replacement,

switch the front panel ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY.

6Ć12

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Some applications of the CSA 803C may require that the power remain on.

To electrically lock the power on, use the following procedure:

Electrical LockĆOn of

the Front Panel

ON/STANDBY Power

Switch

ăStep 1:ăSwitch the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF.

ăStep 2:ăRemove the AC power cable.

ăStep 3:ăPosition the instrument on its left (handle) side, as viewed from

the front.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the bottom cover.

ăStep 5:ăLocate the A4 Regulator board.

ăStep 6:ăLocate the J820 jumper on the A4 Regulator board.

ăStep 7:ăReposition the J820 jumper from its two outer (right side) pins

to its two inner (left side) pins, without dropping the jumper.

ăStep 8:ăReplace the bottom cover. Turn the instrument in the upright

position.

ăStep 9:ăReconnect the AC power cable and switch the PRINCIPAL

POWER SWITCH to ON.

The power will now remain on regardless of the setting of the ON/

STANDBY power switch.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the instrument and/or sampling head, do not

install or remove a sampling head while the power is on.

ăStep 10:ăTo turn the power off while the ON/STANDBY power switch is

disabled, use the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH.

To return to normal operation of the ON/STANDBY Power Switch, follow the

preceding steps in reverse order.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A15

Memory

Management

Unit (MMU)

CRT Driver

A14

Input/Ouput (I/O)

A18

Memory

A12 Rear Panel

A7 CRT Socket

A17

Main Processor

A13 Mother

A5 Time

A11

Base/Controller

Front Panel

Button

A10

Front Panel

Control

CRT

Acquisition Unit

Holding Rod

Touch Panel

Acquisition Unit

Delay Line

A2 Power Supply

Module

Fan Motor Housing

M/F Power

Connect

Regulator

M/F Strobe Drive

Figure 6Ć1:ăField Replaceable Units (FRU) Locator

6Ć14

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A28

Acquisition MPU

Board

A22/A23

Head Interconnect

Boards

A21

Acquisition

AnalogBoard

A20/A21

Head Interconnect

Boards (Power Only)

A19

StrobelTDR

Buffer Board

A26

M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board

Figure 6Ć1:ąField Replaceable Unit (FRU) Locator (Cont.)

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

The Power Supply module slides out of the rear of the CSA 803C for mainteĆ

nance and troubleshooting. It may also be removed to gain better access to

the A3 M/F Power Connect board or the A4 Regulator board.

Power Supply

Module Removal/

Replacement

See Figure 6Ć2 and Figure 6Ć3 for connector and screw locations.

Power Supply RearĆplate Screws (4)

FanĆhousing Screws (4)

Line Fuse

(F99)

Power Supply RearĆplate Screws (4)

Rear Panel ConnectorĆplate Screws (4)

Figure 6Ć2:ăRemoving the Power SupplyModule, Fan Housing, and Rear Panel Connector Plate

6Ć16

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

J70

J81

J65

Power Supply

Module Rear

J64

J63

J66

J62

Figure 6Ć3:ăA2A2 Control Rectifier Board Connector Locations

To remove the Power Supply module from the CSA 803C, proceed asfolĆ

lows:

ăStep 1:ăTurn the instrument on its left side (as viewed facing the rear

panel). The Power Supply module will now be at the bottom of the

instrument.

ăStep 2:ăRemove the eight Torx head screws that secure the power

supply module.

ăStep 3:ăCarefully pull the Power Supply module partially out of the

instrument. Stop short of stretching taut or binding the wires from the

A2A2 Control Rectifier board connectors.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the connector pins, pull the Power Supply

module only partially out of the instrument.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

ăStep 4:ăRemove the wire connectors from the pins on the A2A2 Control

Rectifier board.

ăStep 5:ăRemove the chassis ground (greenĆyellow) wire that is conĆ

nected to the Power Supply module from the chassis of the instrument.

ăStep 6:ăRemove the Power Supply module.

To replace the Power Supply module, perform the previous steps in reverse

order.

NOTE

Align the metal guides on the top of the Power Supply module with

the grooves inside the upper part of the opening in the instrument.

Be careful not to pinch any wires or interconnecting cables while

installing the Power Supply module.

6Ć18

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

See Figure 6Ć2 for connector and screw locations.

Remove and replace the fan motor as follows:

Fan Motor Removal/

Replacement

ăStep 1:ăUsing a pencil or tape, mark the top of the fan motor housing

for later use in determining the positioning of the motor. Remove the four

screws securing the housing to the rear of the instrument mainframe.

Hold the housing as you remove the last screws.

ăStep 2:ăSeparate the grill and the housing from the motor.

ăStep 3:ăRemove the two wires at their motor connections. Note that the

red wire is (+) and the brown wire is (-).

ăStep 4:ăRemove the fan motor.

NOTE

Observe the position in which the motor was mounted. Ensure that

the motor is remounted in its original positioning, or the fan wires

may not reach.

To replace the fan motor, perform the previous steps in reverse order and

note the following additional points while replacing the motor:

use the mark from Step 1 to determine the original positioning of the

motor

tighten the screws securely

remove the mark from the top of the housing

check that nowires contact the fan blades

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the fan connection, be careful not to pinch

the wires under the fan housing.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Cathode Ray Tube

(CRT) Removal/

Replacement

WARNING

The cathode ray tube (CRT) may retain a dangerous electrical

(16 kV) charge. To prevent electric shock, fully discharge the anode

before removing the CRT. Short the anode lead from the CRT to the

chassis. Wait approximately ten minutes and again firmly short the

anode lead to the chassis. Then, remove the CRT.

If the CRT breaks, the glass fragments scatter at a high velocity

(implosion). Use extreme care when handling the CRT. Protective

clothing and safety glasses should be worn. Avoid striking the CRT

on any object which might cause it to crack or implode. When

storing a CRT, place it in a protective carton or set the CRT face

down in a protected location with a smooth surface and with the

CRT faceplate on a soft mat.

See Figures 6Ć1, 6Ć4, 6Ć5, 6Ć6, 6Ć7, 6Ć13, and 6Ć32 for module, connector,

screw, and index locations.

Remove the CRT as follows:

ăStep 1:ăRemove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover,

and then the CRT cover.

ăStep 2:ăSet the instrument in the inverted position.

ăStep 3:ăUse a 1/16Ćinch Allen wrench to loosen the two small screws

that secure the two control knobs. Carefully remove the control knobs

so that you do not lose the small Allen screws inside the knobs.

CAUTION

When replacing the two control knobs, do not overtighten the two

Allen screws.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the two Torx head screws on the bottom of the A9

Touch Panel Assembly.

ăStep 5:ăLift up on the bottom of the A9 Touch Panel Assembly and

swing the assembly outward. The top of the A9 Touch Panel Assembly is

held in place with two tabs that hookunder the top of the chassis. Pull

the assembly out until you can access the blackground wire that conĆ

nects the A9 Touch Panel Assembly to the instrument chassis.

ăStep 6:ăRemove the quickĆdisconnect ground connector that connects

the blackground wire to the instrument chassis.

6Ć20

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

ăStep 7:ăSet the A9 Touch Panel Assembly aside. To avoid stressing the

ribbon cable that is still connected to the A9 Touch Panel Assembly, and

to keep the assembly from cluttering your work space, place the A9

Touch Panel Assembly on top of the sampling head compartments. Do

not damage the A9 Touch Panel Assembly when placing it on top of the

sampling head plugĆin compartments.

ăStep 8:ăCarefully set the instrument on its left side.

ăStep 9:ăRemove the two plastic circuit board guides from the top of the

card cage.

ăStep 10:ăRemove the two Torx head screws that secure the A7 CRT

Socket board cover. Use a short Torx head screwdriver to remove the

rearĆmost Torx head screw.

ăStep 11:ăRemove the A7 CRT Socket board cover.

ăStep 12:ăSlowly pull the A7 CRT Socket board toward the rear of the

instrument to remove the A7 CRT Socket board from the CRT.

NOTE

When reattaching the A7 CRT Socket board to the CRT, align the

pins of the CRT to the receptacles on the A7 CRT Socket board.

Then, slowly push the pins into the receptacles.

Do not force the connectorinto place; doing so can bend orbreak

some of the pins. If the pins do not slide easily into the receptacles,

then pull the A7 CRT Socket board away from the CRT, and realign

the A7 CRT Socket board to the CRT.

WARNING

The CRT anode voltage is 16 kV. To avoid electric shock, ground

the anode lead from the CRT to the chassis to remove any stored

charge remaining in the CRT. Wait approximately ten minutes. Then,

ground the anode load to the chassis again.

ăStep 13:ăRemove connector J54 from the A8 CRT Driver board. Note

the position of the multiĆpin connector's index triangle to ensure that you

can correctly replace the connector.

ăStep 14:ăRemove the four Torx head screws that secure the CRT to the

top of the instrument chassis. Two of the screws are removed from the

front of the front panel chassis, and two of the screws are removed from

behind the front panel casting.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

ăStep 15:ăRemove the top CRT support bar from the instrument. The

CRT support bar is unattached once the four Torx head screws securing

the top of the CRT are removed.

ăStep 16:ăRemove the four Torx head screws that secure the CRT to the

bottom of the instrument chassis. Two of the screws are removed from

the front of the front panel chassis, and two of the screws are removed

from behind the front panel casting.

ăStep 17:ăRemove the bottom CRT support bar from the instrument.

CAUTION

Once the four Torx head screws are removed from the bottom of

the CRT, the CRT is not attached to the instrument. Use care to not

damage the CRT while it is loose in the instrument.

ăStep 18:ăSlowly pull the CRT out of the front panel chassis.

To replace the CRT, perform the previous steps in reverse order.

NOTE

Replacing the CRT will require that the instrument be readjusted.

6Ć22

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

CRT Cover

Torx Head

Screws (3)

Figure 6Ć4:ăRemoving/Replacing the CRT Cover

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A7 CRT Socket

Board Cover

A7 CRT Socket

Board Cover

Torx Head Screws (2)

Transformer

Torx Head Screw

(Removed)

Transformer Cover

A10 Front Panel

ControlBoard

A8 CRT

Driver Board

A9 Touch Panel

Assembly

Anode Lead Cap

CRT

Figure 6Ć5:ăRemoving/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube

6Ć24

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

TorxHead Screws (4)

Top CRT

Support Bar

TorxHead

Screws (4)

QuickĆDisconnect

Ground Connector

Bottom CRT

Support Bar

Figure 6Ć6:ăRemoving/Replacing the CRT Torx Head Screws

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

See Figures 6Ć23, 6Ć26, and 6Ć32 for connector, screw, and index locations.

Acquisition Unit

Removal/

Replacement

Removeand replacetheAcquisition unit as follows (theAcquisition unit can

be removed with the instrument in the normal upright position for all steps):

CAUTION

Lifting the trim covers to remove them will break the trim covers.

There is a clip on the inside of the trim cover that slides over the

end of the side frame section. To remove the trim covers, move

each cover toward the end of the instrument where it is located.

(The front cover moves forward and the rear cover moves backĆ

ward.) Moving the clip about 1/8Ćinch will release the cover. Then,

the cover can be removed from the instrument.

ăStep 1:ăRemovethebolt from thetop of thechassis, just behind the

front casting.

ăStep 2:ăRemove the trim covers from the right side (as viewed from the

front of theinstrument).

ăStep 3:ăRemove the two Torx head screws holding the frame section

and removetheframesection.

ăStep 4:ăRemove connectors J10 on the A26 M/F Acquisition InterconĆ

nect board and J34 on the A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer board. Note the

position of the connectors' index triangles to ensure that the multiĆpin

connectors can be correctly replaced.

ăStep 5:ăRemove connectors J29A, J30A, J32, J33A, and J33B on the

A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer board.

ăStep 6:ăGrab between the two sampling head slots and gently pull out

the Acquisition unit a few inches.

ăStep 7:ăRemovethegray ground wirefrom therear of theAcquisition

unit.

ăStep 8:ăRemove the Acquisition unit.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to interconnecting wires, be careful not to pinch

any interconnecting wires when replacing this unit.

To replace the Acquisition unit, perform the previous steps in reverse order.

6Ć26

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

The instrument contains the following number of batteries on the following

boards:

Battery Disposal and

First Aid

two batteries (in the U500 andU511 RAM sockets) on the A5 Time

Base/Controller board

one battery (BT130) on the A14 I/O board

one battery (BT150) on the A18 Memory board

See Figures 6Ć10, 6Ć19, and6Ć22, respectively, for the location of these

batteries.

WARNING

To avoid personal injury, observe proper procedures for the hanĆ

dling of lithium batteries. Improper handling may cause fire,

explosion, or severe burns. Do not recharge, crush, disassemble,

heat the battery above 100_ C (212_ F), incinerate, or expose the

contentsto water.

Battery Disposal

Dispose of the batteries in accordance with local, state, and federal regulaĆ

tions.

NOTE

Typically, small quantities (less than 20) can be safely disposed of

with ordinary garbage in a sanitary landfill.

Larger quantities must be sent by surface transport to a hazardous

waste disposal facility. The batteries should be individually packĆ

aged to prevent shorting. Then, pack them into a sturdy container

that isclearly labeled, Lithium Batteries Ċ DO NOT OPEN.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Emergency and First Aid Information

In case of accidental contact with the lithium batteries, give your emergency

care provider the followinginformation:

Manufacturer: Panasonic

Battery Type: Lithium PolyĆCarbon monoflouride, BR 2/3 A

Solvent (electrolyte): Gama Butyrlactone is of low toxicity. It can cause

some eye and respiratory irritation. Accordingto the manufacturer, the

solvent may be released during venting. (Venting is an out gassing of

battery material.) This is usually caused by short circuiting(for more

than a few seconds) or by overheating.

H Solute: LIBF4

Table 6Ć3 lists the emergency procedures to follow should you come in

contact with battery solvent.

TableĂ6Ć3:ăEmergency Procedures for Contact with Battery Solvent

Contact

Skin

Do This:

Wash promptly with plenty of water.

Eyes

Flush immediately with plenty of water and use an

emergency eye wash, if available. Report to a medical

professional for treatment.

Inhalation

Ingestion

Leave the area and get fresh air. Report to a medical

professional for treatment.

NonĆtoxic accordingto laboratory testing. However,

report to a medical professional for advice.

In case of venting, clear the immediate area. Ventingwill usually last only

a few seconds.

6Ć28

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Pin connectors are for electrical interconnection with chassisĆmounted

FRU Board and

Assembly Removal

components and other boards. Most boards/assemblies in the instrument

are mounted on the chassis. The followingfour boards plugonto the top of

the A13 Mother board (see Figure 6Ć7 for the location of these boards in the

card cage):

A14 Input/Output (I/O)

A15 Memory Management Unit (MMU)

A17 Executive Processor (EXP)

A18 Memory

The followingtwo boards plugonto the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect

board (See Figure 6Ć1 for the locations of these boards in the Acquisition

unit):

A27 Acquisition Analog

A28 Acquisition MPU

FeedĆthrough connectors join the plugĆon boards to the A13 Mother board

and the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board.

CAUTION

To minimize the chance of static charge damage to the integrated

circuits and/or related circuitry, after removing a board from the

instrument, place it on a grounded, antistatic surface.

Some components that are mounted on a board must be retained

for use with the new assembly. These components would include

interconnecting plugs, support posts, and some wiring.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A15

Plastic Board

Guides

Memory Management

Unit (MMU)

J53

J57 J52

J83

J90

J72

J78

J77

Rear Panel

A18

A14

Input/Output

(I/O)

A17

Executive Processor

(EXP)

Memory

Rear of Oscilloscope

Figure 6Ć7:ăTop View of the Card Cage

6Ć30

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć8 and 6Ć32

for connector, screw, and index locations.

ăStep 1:ăPlace the instrument in the inverted position and remove the

bottom panel.

ăStep 2:ăRemove connectors J16, J27, J28, J33A, J33B, J35, J36, J37,

J38, and J39 from the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board. Then remove connecĆ

tors J10, J18, and J34 from the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board. Note the

position of the connectors and index triangles to ensure that the connecĆ

tors can be correctly replaced.

NOTE

Record the positions of the connectors to ensure that the connecĆ

tors can be correctly replaced.

ăStep 3:ăRemove the five Torx head screws and carefully lift the board,

removingit from the J19 connector on the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board.

To replace the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board, perform the previous steps in

reverse order.

Torx Head

Screws (2)

J16

J36

J37

J27

J15

Torx Head

Screws (2)

J18

J28

J17

J33A J38 J39 J33B

Torx Head

Screw (1)

J10

J34

J19

Figure 6Ć8:ăRemoving/Replacing the A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A3 M/F Power Connect Board

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć2, 6Ć3, 6Ć9

and 6Ć19 for connector, screw, and index locations.

ăStep 1:ăRemove the Power Supply module as described earlier in this

section.

NOTE

The chassis ground (greenĆyellow) wire may be removed from the

Power Supply module for this operation only.

Record the positions of all connectors to ensure that the connecĆ

tors can be correctly replaced.

ăStep 2:ăRemove the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board.

ăStep 3:ăRemove the A5 Time Base/Controller board.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the A4 Regulator board.

ăStep 5:ăRemove J90 from the A14 Input/Output board.

To replace the A3 M/F Power Connect board, perform the previous steps in

reverse order.

WARNING

To prevent electric shock or damage to the instrument, check that

the chassis ground wire is replaced on the Power Supply module.

6Ć32

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A4 Regulator Board

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć2, 6Ć3, 6Ć9,

and 6Ć32 procedures for removal for connector, screw, and index locations.

ăStep 1:ăRemove the Power Supply module. (See Power Supply Module

Removal in this section.)

ăStep 2:ăSet the instrument upright (if not already in this position).

ăStep 3:ăRemove connectors J57 and J60 from the A4 Regulator board.

Note the position of the multiĆpin connectors' index triangles to ensure

that the connectors can be correctly replaced.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the two Torx head screws from the metal heat sink

attached to the rear of this board).

NOTE

The A4 Regulator board is not attached to the chassis. However, it

remains connected to the A3 M/F Power Connect board through

interconnecting pins.

ăStep 5:ăCarefully remove the J95 and J96 pins from the A4 Regulator

board by pulling the A4 Regulator board toward the rear.

ăStep 6:ăRemove the A4 Regulator board.

To replace the A4 Regulator board, perform the previous steps in reverse

order.

NOTE

Match the index triangles on the multiĆpin connectors with the

corresponding square pads on the circuit board.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Torx Head

Screws (2)

J60

J95

J57

J96

Figure 6Ć9:ăRemoving/Replacing the A4 Regulator Board

6Ć34

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A5 Time Base/Controller Board

A6 Calibrator Board

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć10 and 6Ć32

for connector, screw, and index locations.

ăStep 1:ăPlace the instrument in the inverted position.

ăStep 2:ăTo remove the A6 Calibrator Board, remove connectors J1 and

J17 from the A6 Calibrator Board. Remove the Torx head screw securing

the board in place. Lift the board from J91 on the A5 Time Base/ControlĆ

ler Board. Perform this process in reverse to replace the Calibrator

Board.

ăStep 3:ăRemove connectors J16, J29A, J30A, J32, J35, J91, Ext A, and

Presc(if Prescaler is present) from the A5 Time Base/Controller board.

Use extreme care to prevent damage to the cable center connector that

was attached to Presc. Then remove connectors J18 and J83 from the

A5 Time Base/Controller board. Note the position of the multiĆpin conĆ

nector's index triangles to ensure that the connectors can be correctly

replaced.

NOTE

Record the positions of the connectors and the receptacles to

ensure that these connectors and receptacles will be positioned

correctly when reinstalled.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the six Torx head screws holding the board in place.

ăStep 5:ăRemove the A5 Time Base/Controller board.

To replace the board, perform the previous steps in reverse order.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A6 Calibrator

Battery

(U511 RAM Socket)

Battery

(U500 RAM Socket)

Torx head screw

J16

J91

J17

U1000

C1413

R710

C800

R803

R802

R801

R800

J91

U700

U701

U100

U200

U300

U400

U501

U500

R901

R900

R1402

C1001

C3702

U901

R1000

C1000

C901

C902

R810

E901

E902

U801

R1001

R1002

U1001

U1200

U1510

R1003

R1004

MH400

R1005

J902

R3841

R3911

MH100

J903

R1324

R1323

C1511

C1004

C1003

U702

U710

C3841

C811

R1210

R1302

U1010

U1011

U1110

J1320

C1326

CR1210

U1210

C812

U1310

U1312

C110

C210

C410

C510

C511

C610

U610

C710

U711

C310

C1214

U1211

C130C11302

U1311

J15

J32

C1223

J16

U910

U911

U810

C810

U820

J32

C3202

C3301

C1501

R1010

R1011

C1216

C1320

U1332

R1345

C1111

C1220

C1010

U3061

U1220

C1020

C920

U920

R3304

U51430

14 15

C921

U930

U3020

R720

2224

U1021

U3060

U1121

16 17

C1560

R3704

Torx Head

Screw (2)

16 17

2224

1921

U830

U831

U1320

1921

2325

TP1371

2325

C530

SH100

C3700C3211

R3321

R3322

J1570

R1313

R1312

C1321

U1330

U3050

U3021

R3323 C3214

U3032

C330

U1570

J730

J830

R1130

U1040 U1140

C1130

R1356

R1359

R730

C740

R840

C840

C830

U841

R930

U940

C440

U941

U1041

C640

U640

C741

U741

R4002

R4001

CR4001

R3211

R3215

R3212

L3500

U740

U840

U3014

C3305

C1561

C141

C240

U1630

16 17

R1474

J30A

Q4005

CR4005

R4005

R4006

U3081

U440

C3310

R3312

C140

U150

J30A

1921

2325

C3530

SH500

R1150

R1570

R1573

Torx Head

Screw (2)

U240

C650

U651

C750

U750

C751

U751

C850

U850

C851

U851

C950

U950

C1050

C1150

R3135

C951

C1051

R3318

C3312

U1460

R3223

SH200

U3013

U951

U1050

U1150

U1151

28 26

R450

C1213

R3801

R350

U1581

16 17

R351

R352

R353

U53031

TP550

TP551

TP552

10 22

DS156

J450

U551

U650

13151720

TP251

U3080

2224

TP250

J451

C250

20 27

TP553

TP554

TP555

TP556

C1611

R3131

C3110

12141618

DS157

C160

R150

C161

TP260

TP360

1921 25

C260

U260

R260

U360

C360

U361

R3137

J24A

J25A

J24B

J25B

J29A

J860

J861

R3132

R3113

R660

C660

R760

C761

R761

C760

J29A

J860

U161

U250

R3111

U3052

U53051

C460

C860

U860

C961

U961

C1061

C1060

C1161

C1160

C960

U960

R570

J24D

16 17

2224

U3011

U460

U760

U560

U561

U660

U661

U761

U1060

U1061

U1160

U1161

U3056

1921

2325

R3513

J25D

J24C

C370

U371

C270

U370

R3514

L3510

C170

R170

R270

TP770 TP772

TP270

R3561

C1270

C470

SH700

R3112

C3112

C3160

TP771

U770

R3516

R3506

U1252

J35

TP870

U870

R670

R970

R1070

TP1070

SH300

C570

U580

C571

U581

2826242220

U3015

R580

TP584

TP1071

U970

U971

R3151

U771

C1211

C1071

U1080

C1171

U1181

U3016

J25C

C1070

C1170

U1180

R480

U481

C680

TP580

TP581

R1472

R980

C381

U380

C380

U381

TP1471

R1473

U1081

U881

U480

C780

U780

U680

U1371

R1252

R1631

TP582

R590

Torx Head

Screw (2)

TP1570

TP583

U582

U880

U981

U980

U583

TP585

U790

F1180

U1480

C1381

TP980

TP981

TP982

TP983

C1283

U1280

C1371

C1190

C1481

C490

U490

C491

U491

TP586

TP1370

MH200

R1090

C1191

C1292 C1392 C1490

C1280

R1091

MH300

C190

U190

C290

U290

C390

C391

U1380

C392

U391

TP984

TP1090

R890

C890

C1090

J18

L1291

L1290

L1292

R1190

C1290

C1192

C1291

R690

C1391

C1390

U390

DS1190

U191

SH600

TP591

TP590

C1293

C492

C493

J83

R190

R390

J23

J35

J18

J83

Figure 6Ć10:ăRemoving/Replacing the A5 Time Base/Controller and A6 Calibrator Boards

6Ć36

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A7 CRT Socket Board and A8 CRT Driver Board

See Figures 6Ć1, 6Ć4, 6Ć5, 6Ć7, 6Ć11, 6Ć12, 6Ć13, 6Ć15, and 6Ć32 for board,

connector, screw, and index locations.

Removeand replacetheA7 CRT Socket board and theA8 CRT Driver board

as follows:

ăStep 1:ăRemove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover,

and then remove the CRT cover.

ăStep 2:ăRemove the two plastic circuit board guides on top of the card

cage.

ăStep 3:ăRemove the two Torx head screws that secure the A7 CRT

Socket board cover, and then remove the A7 CRT Socket board cover.

ăStep 4:ăSlowly pull theA7 CRT Socket board toward therear of the

instrument to remove the A7 CRT Socket board from the CRT.

ăStep 5:ăRemove connectors J53 and J56 on the A7 CRT Socket board.

Note the positions of the multiĆpin connectors' index triangles to ensure

that you can correctly replace these connectors.

WARNING

The CRT anode voltage is 16 kV. To avoid electric shock, ground

the anode lead from the CRT to the chassis to short any stored

charge remaining in the CRT. Wait approximately ten minutes, then

ground the anode lead to the chassis again (refer to Step 6).

ăStep 6:ăUsea nonĆconducting tool to pry up theanodelead cap. This

rubber cap is located on the upper part of the CRT, behind the front

casting. Using a nonĆconducting tool, releasethespring clip insidethe

cap and remove the anode. Insert one blade of a pair of needleĆnose

pliers against theanode, and touch theother bladeto thetop of the

front casting to ground theanodeto thechassis.

ăStep 7:ăRemove the single Torx head screw that secures the A8 CRT

Driver board to the instrument chassis. Use either of the following methĆ

ods to remove the Torx head screw:

Remove the Torx head screw with a very short handled TĆ15 Torx

head screwdriver. Ensure that you do not strike the CRT while

removing the screw.

Remove the A10 Front Panel Control board. Then, use a Torx head

screwdriver that has an extension length inserted in it to remove the

Torx head screw. Access the screw from the hole in the left side of

theinstrument chassis. Ensurethat you do not striketheCRT while

removing the screw.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

ăStep8:ă Remove the single Torx head screws that secures the transĆ

former, on the A8 CRT Driver board, to the instrument chassis. This

screw is located at the rear of the transformer. The A8 CRT Driver board

is now not attached to the instrument chassis.

ăStep9:ă Remove connectors J52, J56, and J57 from the A8 CRT Driver

board. Note the position of the multiĆpin connectors' index triangles to

ensure that you can correctly replace these connectors.

ăStep10:ă Lift the A8 CRT Driver board partially out of the instrument

chassis.

ăStep11:ă Remove connectors J54 and J55 from the A8 CRT Driver

board. Note the position of the multiĆpin connectors' index triangles to

ensure that you can correctly replace these connectors.

ăStep12:ă Remove the A8 CRT Driver board and the A7 CRT Socket

board.

ăStep13:ă Unsolder the two wires that connect the A8 CRT Driver board

to the A7 CRT Socket board (the two boards are now separated).

To replace the A8 CRT Driver board and the A7 CRT Socket board, perform

the previous steps in reverse order.

Solder Points

J56

J53

Figure 6Ć11:ăRemoving/Replacing the A7 CRT Socket Board

6Ć38

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Torx Head

Screw

J52

J57

J56

J54

J55

Figure 6Ć12:ăRemoving/Replacing the A8 CRT Driver Board

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A9 Touch Panel Assembly

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć5, 6Ć15 and

6Ć32 for connector, screw, and index locations.

Remove and replace the A9 Touch Panel assembly as follows:

ăStep 1:ăSet the instrument on its right side. (The CRT will now be at the

top.)

ăStep 2:ăUse a 1/16Ćinch Allen wrench to loosen the small Allen screws

in each of the two control knobs.

ăStep 3:ăSlowly removethetwo control knobs so that you do not lose

thesmall Allen screws insidetheknobs.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the two Torx head screws at the bottom of the A9

Touch Panel Assembly.

ăStep 5:ăLift up on thebottom of theA9 Touch Panel Assembly, and

swing theassembly outward.

NOTE

The top of the A9 Front Panel Assembly is held by two tabs. These

tabs fit into two slots in the frontĆpanel chassis.

ăStep 6:ăRemovetheblack ground wirefrom thequickĆdisconnect

ground connector on the front panel casting.

ăStep 7:ăRemove connector J73 from the A10 Front Panel Control board.

Notetheposition of multiĆpin connector's index triangleto ensurethat

you can correctly replace this connector. Carefully remove the wire cable

through theslot provided in thefront casting.

Cover the A9 Touch Panel Assembly with protective material once it is

removed, since the plastic exterior may scratch.

To replace the A9 Touch Panel Assembly board, perform the previous steps

in reverse order.

NOTE

Feed any slack cable from connector J73 to inside the chassis

(near the A10 Front Panel Control board). Be careful not to pinch

the interconnecting cable while replacing the front panel bezel.

6Ć40

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A9 Touch Panel

Assembly

Torx Head Screws (2)

Front of Instrument

as Viewed from the Bottom

Figure 6Ć13:ăA9 Touch Panel Assembly Torx Head Screws

J73

Connector

Figure 6Ć14:ăRemoving/Replacing the A9 Touch Panel Assembly

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A10 Front Panel Control Board

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć5, 6Ć11,

6Ć15 and 6Ć32 for connector, screw, and index locations.

ăStep 1:ăRemove the CRT shield. (Refer to Cathode Ray Tube Removal

in this section, beginning at Step 4.)

ăStep 2:ăRemove connectors J72, J73, J74, and J75 from the A10 Front

Panel Button board. Note the position of the multiĆpin connectors' index

triangles to ensure that the connectors can be correctly replaced.

ăStep 3:ăRemove the two Torx head screws at the upper edge of the

board.

ăStep 4:ăLift the board away from the guides at its bottom and remove it.

To replace the A10 Front Panel Control board, perform the previous steps in

reverse order.

6Ć42

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Torx Head

Screws (2)

Support

Bracket

J72

J74

J73

J75

Figure 6Ć15:ăRemoving/Replacing the A10 Front Panel Control Board

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A11 Front Panel Button Board

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć5, 6Ć11,

6Ć15, 6Ć16 and 6Ć32 for connector, screw, and index locations.

ăStep 1:ăRemove the CRT shield. (Refer to the removal instructions

under Cathode Ray Tube Removal/Replacement earlier in this section,

beginning at Step 4.)

ăStep 2:ăRemove connector J75 from the A10 Front Panel Control board.

Note the position of connector's index triangle for correct replacement.

ăStep 3:ăRemove the two Torx head screws from the A11 Front Panel

Button board, which is located at the top and near the inside center of

the front casting.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the A11 Front Panel Button board.

To replace the A11 Front Panel Button board, perform the previous steps in

reverse order.

TorxHead Screws (2)

Rear View of the A11 Front Panel Button Board

Figure 6Ć16:ăRemoving/Replacing the A11 Front Panel Button Board

6Ć44

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A12 Rear Panel Assembly

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć2, 6Ć17 and

6Ć32 for connector, screw, and index locations.

ăStep 1:ăRemove the connectors from the RSĆ232ĆC, the GPIB, and the

PRINTER connector holders.

ăStep 2:ăRemove the eight Torx head screws from the outer edges of the

rear panel connector plate.

ăStep 3:ăTilt the plate back from the instrument. Remove connector J78

from the top of the A12 Rear Panel assembly. Remove the grounding

wire. Note the position ofthe connector's index triangle to ensure that

the connector can be correctly replaced.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the rear panel connector plate and the attached A12

Rear Panel Assembly.

ăStep 5:ăRemove the following items from the rear panel plate:

two bail brackets, screws, and washers from the PRINTER connecĆ

tor

two posts from the GPIB connector

posts, lockwashers, and flat washers from the RSĆ232ĆC connecĆ

tor(s)

H Torx head screw and washer (at lower left, if present)

ăStep 6:ăRemove the A12 Rear Panel Assembly from the rear panel

connector plate.

CAUTION

The metal covers on the PRINTER and on the GPIB connectors are

loose. If the board is inverted, these covers will fall off.

To replace the A12 Rear Panel assembly, perform the previous steps in

reverse order.

NOTE

Replacement of connector J78 will be simplified if youreplace the

connector before reinstalling the rear panel connector plate on the

rear of the chassis.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

RSĆ232ĆC

Connector

J78

Top

(As Viewed from the Rear with

the Rear Panel Removed)

GPIB

Connector

PRINTER

Connector

Figure 6Ć17:ăRemoving/Replacing the A12 Rear Panel Assembly

6Ć46

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A13 Mother Board

Removal andreplacement steps are listedbelow. See Figures 6Ć7, 6Ć18 and

6Ć32 for connector, screw, andindex locations.

ăStep 1:ăRemove the three Torx headscrews that secure the CRT cover,

andthen remove the CRT cover. Remove the cardcage retainer from

the top front of the cardcage by removing the cardcage's two screws.

Remove both circuit boardguides from the top of the cardcage. The

other ends of the guides contain slots that attach to the edge of a metal

bracket. Both ends of the guides can be pried loose.

ăStep 2:ăRemove the A14 I/O, A15 MMU, A17 Executive Processor, and

A18 Memory boards. Note the position of the multiĆpin connectors' index

triangles to ensure that the connectors can be correctly replaced.

NOTE

Tag the interconnecting plugs and mark the board locations to

ensure that the plugs can be correctly replaced as well.

ăStep 3:ăRemove connector J63A from the A13 Mother board.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the six Torx headscrews.

ăStep 5:ăRemove the A13 Mother board.

To replace the A13 Mother board, perform the previous steps in reverse

order.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the interconnecting wires, be careful not to

pinch the wires along the inside edge while replacing this board.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

J63A

Torx Head Screws (6)

Figure 6Ć18:ăRemoving/Replacing the A13 Mother Board

6Ć48

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A14 Input/Output (I/O) Board

See Figures 6Ć4, 6Ć7, 6Ć19, and 6Ć32 for board, connector, screw, and index

locations.

Remove andreplace the A14 I/O boardas follows:

ăStep 1:ăRemove the three Torx headscrews that secure the CRT cover,

andthen remove the CRT cover.

ăStep 2:ăRemove both of the plastic boardguides from the top of the

cardcage. These guides are retainedby two small catches locatedin

two holes in the left bracket of the cardcage. The other ends of the

guides contain slots that attach to the edge of a metal bracket. Both

ends of the guides can be pried loose.

ăStep 3:ăRemove connectors J72, J77, J78, andJ90 from the A14 I/O

board. Note the position of multiĆpin connector index triangles to ensure

that you can be correctly replace these connectors.

ăStep 4:ăLift the white, hinged tab at the upper, front edge of the board.

Pull the tab upwarduntil the A14 I/O boardseparates from the A13

Mother board.

ăStep 5:ăRemove the A14 I/O board.

To replace the A14 I/O board, perform the previous steps in reverse order.

NOTE

Insert the board edges into the plastic guides at each end of the

card cage. Lower the board into position.

Ensure that connector P105 is seated on the A13 Mother board

connector. Push down firmly on the A14 I/O board to seat this

connector on the A13 Mother board.

WARNING

A lithium battery (BT130) is mounted on the A14 I/O board. Be

careful when placingthe A14 I/O board on metal surfaces. If some

IC or battery leads are shorted, the battery may discharge or overĆ

heat and vent. (You can use plastic standoffs to prevent short

circuits.) This battery requires special handling for disposal.

Refer to the instructions on Lithium Battery Disposal and First Aid

earlier in this section.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

J78

J77

J90

J72

Front of Oscilloscope

P105

Lithium Battery

(BT130)

(to A13 Mother Board

Connector)

Figure 6Ć19:ăRemoving/Replacing the A14 I/O Board

6Ć50

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A15 Memory Management Unit (MMU) Board

See Figures 6Ć4, 6Ć7, 6Ć20, and 6Ć32 for board, connector, screw, and index

locations.

Remove and replace the A15 MMU board as follows:

ăStep 1:ăRemove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover,

and then remove the CRT cover.

ăStep 2:ăRemove both ofthe plastic board guides from the top ofthe

card cage. The guides are retained by two small catches located in two

holes in the letf bracket ofthe card cage. The other ends ofthe guides

contain slots attach to the edge ofa metal bracket. Both ends ofthe

guides can be pried loose.

ăStep 3:ăRemove connectors J52, J53, J57, and J83 from the A15 MMU

board. Note the position ofmultiĆpin connector index triangles to ensure

that you can correctly replace these connectors.

ăStep 4:ăLift the white, hinged tabs at the front and rear edges of the A15

MMU board. Pull the tabs upward until the A15 MMU board separates

from the A13 Mother board.

ăStep 5:ăRemove the A15 MMU board.

To replace the A15 MMU board, perform the previous steps in the reverse

order.

NOTE

Insert the board edges into the plastic guides at each end of the

card cage. Lower the board into position.

Ensure that connector P101 is seated on the A13 Mother board

connector. Push down firmly on the A15 MMU board to seat this

connector on the A13 Mother board.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

J83

J53

J57

J52

Front of Oscilloscope

P101

(To A13 MotherBoard

Connector)

Figure 6Ć20:ăRemoving/Replacing the A15 MMU Board

6Ć52

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A17 Executive Processor (EXP) Board

See Figures 6Ć4, 6Ć7, 6Ć21, and 6Ć32 for board, connector, screw, and index

locations.

Remove and replace the A17 Executive Processor board as follows:

ăStep 1:ăRemove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover,

and then remove the CRT cover.

ăStep 2:ăRemove both of the plastic board guides from the top of the

card cage. The guides are retained by two small catches located in two

holes in the left bracket of the card cage. The other ends of the guides

contain slots that attach to the edge of a metal bracket. Both ends of the

guides can be pried loose.

ăStep 3:ăRemove connector J77 from the A17 Executive Processor

board. Note the position of the multiĆpin connector's index triangle to

ensure that you can correctly replace this connector.

ăStep 4:ăLift the white, hinged tabs at the front and rear edges of the

board. Pull the tabs upward until the A17 Executive Processor board

separates from the A13 Mother board.

ăStep 5:ăRemove the A17 Executive Processor board.

To replace the A17 Executive Processor board, perform the previous steps in

reverse order.

NOTE

Insert the board edges into the plastic guides at each end of the

card cage. Lower the board into position.

Ensure that connector P104 on the A17 Executive Processor board

is seated on the A13 Mother board connector. Push down firmly on

the A17 Executive Processor board to seat this connector on the

A13 Mother board.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

J77

Front of Oscilloscope

P104

(To A13 Mother Board

Connector)

Figure 6Ć21:ăRemoving/Replacing the A17 Executive Processor Board

6Ć54

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A18 Memory Board

See Figures 6Ć4, 6Ć7, 6Ć21, 6Ć22, and 6Ć32 for board, connector, screw, and

index locations.

Remove and replace the A18 Memory board as follows:

ăStep 1:ăRemove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover,

and then remove the CRT cover.

ăStep 2:ăRemove both of the plastic board guides from the top of the

card cage. The guides are retained by two small catches located in two

holes in the left bracket of the card cage. The other ends of the guides

contain slots that attach to the edge of a metal bracket. Both ends of the

guides can be pried loose.

ăStep 3:ăRemove connector J77 from the A17 Executive Processor

board. Note the position of the multiĆpin connector's index triangle to

ensure that you can correctly replace this connector.

ăStep 4:ăLift the white, hinged tabs at the front and rear edges of the

board. Pull the tabs upward until the A18 Memory board separates from

the A13 Mother board.

ăStep 5:ăRemove the A18 Memory board.

To replace the A18 Memory board, perform the previous steps in reverse

order.

NOTE

Insert the edges of the board into the plastic guides at each end of

the card cage. Lower the board into position.

Ensure that connector P106 is seated on the A13 Mother board

connector. Push down firmly on the A18 Memory board to seat this

connector on the A13 Mother board.

WARNING

A lithium battery (BT130) is mounted on the A18 Memory board. Be

careful when placing the A18 Memory board on metal surfaces. If

some IC or battery leads are shorted, the battery may discharge or

overheat and vent. (You can use plastic standoffs to prevent short

circuits.) This batteryrequires special handling for disposal.

Refer to the instructions on Lithium Battery Disposal and First Aid

earlier in this section.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Frontof Oscilloscope

P106

Lithium Battery

(BT150)

(To A13 Mother Board

Connector)

Figure 6Ć22:ăRemoving/Replacing the A18 Memory Board

6Ć56

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer Board

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć23, 6Ć26,

and 6Ć32 for connector, screw, and index locations.

ăStep 1:ăRemove the Acquisition unit and position the Acquisition unit in

the upright position.

ăStep 2:ăRemove the two Torx head screws on each blackretaining

brace located at the top of the Acquisition unit to remove these braces.

ăStep 3:ăRemove connectors J3A, J4A, J1B, J2B, J3C, J4C, J29A, J30A,

J32, J33A, J33B, and J34 from the A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer board.

NOTE

Record the positions of the connectors and the receptacles to

ensure that the connectors and receptacles can be correctly reĆ

placed.

ăStep 4:ăRemove J10 from the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board.

ăStep 5:ăRemove the two Torx head screws on the bottom of the A19

Strobe/TDR Buffer board, and gently pull out the board.

To replace the A19 Strobe/TDR board, perform the previous steps in reverse

order.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

J4C J3C

J3A

J4A

J32

J33A J33B

J2B

J1B

J34

Torx Head Screws (2)

J29A

J30A

Figure 6Ć23:ăRemoving/Replacing the A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer Board

6Ć58

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A20/A21 Head Interconnect (Power Only) and

A22/A23 Head lnterconnect Boards

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć23, 6Ć24,

6Ć25, 6Ć26, 6Ć28, 6Ć29, and 6Ć32 for connector and screw locations.

ăStep 1:ăRemove the Acquisition unit and position the Acquisition unit in

the upright position.

ăStep 2:ăRemove the two Torx head screws on each black retaining

brace located at the top of the Acquisition unit.

ăStep 3:ăRemove the A27 Acquisition Analog board, the A28 Acquisition

MPUboard and the A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer board.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the four screws holding the top front subpanel of the

Acquisition unit.

ăStep 5:ăRemove the four screws on the goldĆcolored locking bar loĆ

cated on the top front of the Acquisition unit.

ăStep 6:ăTurn the Acquisition unit in the inverted position and repeat

Step 5 on the bottom of the Acquisition unit.

ăStep 7:ăRemove the connectors from the A26 M/F Acquisition InterconĆ

nect board connector. Note the position of the multiĆpin connector's

index triangle to ensure that the connector can be correctly replaced.

ăStep 8:ăRemove the Front Subpanel assembly with the A20ĆA23 Head

Interconnect boards intact.

ăStep 9:ăRemove the bottom Torx head screw from within the sampling

head compartment that contains the head interconnect board you are

removing.

ăStep 10:ăTurn the Front Subpanel assembly around so that the open

compartments face away from you.

ăStep 11:ăRemove the top nut that fastens the sampling head compartĆ

ment to the head interconnect board you are removing.

ăStep 12:ăRemove the Head Interconnect board by slightly prying up on

the tabs that are keeping it in place, and slowly remove the board(s)

from the J1/2/3/4 connector.

To replace the A20/A21 Head Interconnect (Power Only) or the A22/A23

Head Interconnect boards, perform the previous steps in reverse order. Be

sure to replace the Power Only boards at J11 and J12 on the A26 M/F

Acquisition Interconnect board.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

J1/2/3/4

Figure 6Ć24:ăRemoving/Replacing the A20/A21 Head Interconnect

(Power Only) and the A22/A23 Head Interconnect Boards

6Ć60

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Front View of Front Subpanel Assembly

Power Only

Sampling Head

Compartments

Torx Head Screws

Rear View of Front Subpanel Assembly

A22 and A23 Head Interconnect

A20 and A21 Head Interconnect

Board Retaining Nuts (Power Only)

Board Retaining Nuts

A22 and A23 Head

Interconnect

Boards

A20 and A21 Head

Interconnect

Boards (Power

Only)

Retaining Tabs

(4 per Board)

Retaining Tabs

(4 per Board)

Figure 6Ć25:ăRemoving/Replacing the Front Subpanel Assembly

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A26 M/F Acquisition lnterconnect Board

Removal and replacement Steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć23, 6Ć25,

6Ć26, 6Ć27, 6Ć28, 6Ć29, and 6Ć32 for connector, screw, and index locations.

ăStep 1:ăRemovetheAcquisition unit and position theAcquisition unit in

theupright position.

ăStep 2:ăRemovetheA27 Acquisition Analog board, theA28 Acquisition

MPU board, and the A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer board.

ăStep 3:ăRemove the four screws on the gold colored retaining brace

holding thetop of theFront Subpanel assembly of theAcquisition unit.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the four screws on the gold colored locking bar located

on thetop front of theAcquisition unit.

ăStep 5:ăTurn the Acquisition unit in the inverted position and repeat

Steps 3 and 4 on thebottom of theAcquisition unit.

ăStep 6:ăRemove connectors J11, J12, J13, and J14 on the A26 M/F

Acquisition Interconnect board. Notetheposition of themultiĆpin conĆ

nectors' index triangles to ensure that the connectors can be correctly

replaced.

J11

J12

J13

J14

J10

Figure 6Ć26:ăRemoving/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect Board

6Ć62

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

ăStep 7:ăRemove the Front Subpanel assembly with the head interconĆ

nect boards intact.

ăStep 8:ăRemove the six Torx head screws to remove the A26 M/F AcĆ

quisition lnterconnect board.

To replace the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board, perform the previous

steps in reverse order.

Acquisition

Unit Chassis

A26 M/F

Acquisition

Interconnect

Board

TorxHead Screws (6)

Figure 6Ć27:ăTop View of the A26 Mainframe Acquisition Interconnect Board

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A27 Acquisition Analog Board

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć23, 6Ć26,

6Ć28, and 6Ć32 for board guide, screw, and index locations.

ăStep 1:ăRemove the Acquisition unit and position the Acquisition unit in

the upright position.

ăStep 2:ăRemove the two Torx head screws on each black retaining

brace located at the topof the Acquisition unit to remove these braces.

ăStep 3:ăRemove connectors J41, J42, J43 and J44 from the A27 AcĆ

quisition Analog board.

ăStep 4:ăPull upon the hinged white tabs until the board separates from

connector P6.

To replace the A27 Acquisition Analog board, perform the previous steps in

reverse order.

NOTE

Insert the edges of the board into the plastic guides. Lower the

board into position.

Check that connector is seated on the A26 M/F Acquisition InterĆ

connect board connector. Push down firmly on the A27 Acquisition

Analog board to seat this connector on the A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect board.

J41 J42

J43 J44

P5/6 (to A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board Connector)

Figure 6Ć28:ăRemoving/Replacing the A27 Acquisition Analog Board

6Ć64

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

A28 Acquisition MPU Board

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6Ć23, 6Ć26,

6Ć29, and 6Ć32 for board guide, screw, and index locations.

ăStep 1:ăRemove the Acquisition unit and position it upright.

ăStep 2:ăRemove the two Torx head screws on each black retaining

brace located at the top of the Acquisitionunit; remove these braces.

ăStep 3:ăPull up on the hinged white tabs until the board separates from

connector P8 on the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board.

To replace the A28 AcquisitionMPU board, perform the previous steps in

reverse order.

NOTE

Insert the edges of the board into the plastic guides. Lower the

board into position.

Check that the connector is seated on the A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect board connector. Push down firmly on the A28 AcĆ

quisition MPU board to seat this connector on the A26 M/F AcquisiĆ

tion Interconnect board.

P7/8 (to A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board Connector)

Figure 6Ć29:ăRemoving/Replacing the A28 Acquisition MPU Board

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

The procedures for removing and replacing the FRU ICs in the CSA 803C

are outlined in this section.

FRU IC Removal

Serial Data Interface Integrated Circuits (SlamĆPack" ICs)

U330 is mounted on the A14 I/O board. See Figure 6Ć30 for the location of

this IC. It has a raised, ridged, heat sink cover. The IC is oriented to its

socket by a beveled corner. The other corners are notched to fit the edges

ofthe socket. The beveled corner aligns with a spring (small metal tab) at

one corner ofthe socket. An example ofthe IC is shown in Figure 6Ć32.

To remove the Serial Data Interface IC, proceed as follows:

ăStep 1:ăRemove the A14 I/O board.

ăStep 2:ăHold the heat sink cover in place and unfasten the retaining clip

by moving the retaining clip across the tabs while pushing down slightly

on the cover.

CAUTION

To prevent static damage to the instrument or components, observe

all the special precautions mentioned under StaticĆSensitive ClassiĆ

fication in this section.

ăStep 3:ăRemove the cover slowly to prevent the IC from falling out.

Before removing the IC, note the position of the IC index for later use.

ăStep 4:ăRemove the IC with tweezers.

CAUTION

Finger oils can degrade reliability of components. Avoid touching

the IC or its socket contacts with your fingers.

6Ć66

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Replace the Serial Data Interface IC as follows:

ăStep 1:ăUsing tweezers, place the beveled corner of the replacement IC

against the index spring (the original position of this index was noted

earlier).

CAUTION

Do not damage the spring by improperly seating the beveled

corner because shorting of the two corner contacts could result.

ăStep 2:ăArrange the other corners, with the tweezers, to fit evenly at the

edges of the socket.

ăStep 3:ăSet the cover flat on the IC with the cover's end tabs properly

aligned with, but not in, the mating recesses in the socket.

ăStep 4:ăPush down on the cover, keeping it flat on the IC, and slide the

cover end tabs into place. Hold it there while moving the retaining clip

over the tabs at the other end of the cover.

ăStep 5:ăSlightly pull on the cover to check that the cover is secure.

ăStep 6:ăReplace the A14 I/O board.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Time Base Processor Firmware

U310 U300

U400 U410

Serial Data

Interlace IC

U330

A14-Input/Output (I/O)

A5-Time Base/Controller

Display Processor

Firmware

U140

U150

U830 U820 U810

U800

Executive Processor

Firmware

U900

U910

U920

U930

A18ĆMemory

A15ĆMemory Management Unit

AcquisitionProcessor

Firmware

U611

A28-Acquisition MPU

Figure 6Ć30:ăFRU IC Detail

6Ć68

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Firmware Integrated Circuits (Dual InĆLine Package" ICs)

The firmware ICs are located on four separate boards (see Figure 6Ć30 for

the IC locations on each circuit board). The boards and their respective

firmware (FW) are:

A5 Time Base/Controller board Ċ Time Base Processor FW (U300,

U310, U400 and U410)

A15 MMU board Ċ Display Processor FW (U140 and U150)

A18 Memory board Ċ Main Processor FW (U800, U810, U820, U830,

U900, U910, U920 and U930)

A28 Acquisition MPU board Ċ Acquisition Processor FW (U611)

All of the ICs listed above are ordered by a single Tektronix part number, as

a single firmware kit. (EachIC cannot be ordered separately .) For the

CSA 803A, the firmware kit number is 020Ć1717ĆXX.

To remove and replace the firmware ICs in your CSA 803C, follow these

procedures:

WARNING

Dangerous shockhazards may be exposed when the instrument

covers are removed. Before proceeding, ensure that the CSA 803C

PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH is in the OFF position. Then, disconĆ

nect the instrument from the power source. Disassembly should

only be attempted by qualified service personnel.

CAUTION

To prevent static damage to the instrument, observe all the special

precautions mentioned under StaticĆSensitive Classification in this

section.

Firmware Upgrade Procedure

To upgrade or replace your firmware ICs, complete the following steps:

ăStep 1:ăPrepare the instrument for the firmware upgrade procedure as

follows:

Set the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF, and remove the power

cord.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Place the instrument on its right side (if not already in this position)

to provide access to the boards upgraded in the firmware upgrade

procedure that follows.

ăStep 2:ăAccess boards within the card cage as follows:

Ensure that the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH is set to OFF andthe

power cord is disconnected.

Remove the instrument's top panel cover.

Remove the two plastic boardguides from the top of the cardcage

(at the left rear of the instrument).

Remove the three Torx headscrews that secure the CRT cover, and

then remove the CRT cover (see Figure 6Ć4).

ăStep 3:ăUpgrade the A15 MMU board firmware as follows:

Remove the A15 MMU boardfrom the cardcage. The A15 MMU

boardis typically locatedfarthest from the outside (left side) of the

instrument.

Locate the two firmware ICs, U140 andU150.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the firmware ICs or the board, ensure pin 1 is

positioned correctly when replacing components.

NOTE

Use the IC InsertionĆExtractionPliers showninFigure 6Ć31 for

removing and replacing the ICs. (Refer to Table 4Ć2, Test EquipĆ

ment for the part number of these pliers.)

Do not use the label onthe IC for anindex because it may be

applied incorrectly. (See Figure 6Ć32 for the correct location of the

index on the IC.)

Remove U140 andreplace it with the upgradedIC. The last twoĆdigit

portion of the part number on the replacement IC shouldbe the

same as, or higher than, that on the removedIC. Ensure that pin 1 is

orientedcorrectly.

Similarly replace U150 with the upgraded IC.

6Ć70

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Figure 6Ć31:ăIC InsertionĆExtraction Tool

ăStep 4:ăUpgradetheA18 Memory board firmwareas follows:

RemovetheA18 Memory board from thecard cage. TheA18

Memory board is typically located oneslot from theoutside(left

side) of the instrument.

On theA18 Memory board, replacethefollowing ICs:

U800

U812

U820

U830

U900

U910

U920

U930

In each case, the last twoĆdigits of the part number on the replaceĆ

ment IC should bethesameas, or higher than, that on theremoved

IC. Again, ensure that pin 1 is oriented correctly.

Return the A18 Memory board to its former location in the card

cage.

ăStep 5:ăUpgrade the A5 Time Base/Controller board firmware as folĆ

lows:

LocateU300, U310, U400 and U410 on theA5 TimeBase/Controller

board (seeFigure6Ć30). Thesecomponents arefound near the

bottom front of the instrument with the instrument positioned on its

right side.

ReplaceU300, U310, U400 and U410 on theA5 TimeBase/ControlĆ

ler board.

The last twoĆdigit portion of the part number on the replacement IC

should bethesameas, or higher than, that on theremoved IC.

Again, ensure that pin 1 is oriented correctly.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

ăStep 6:ăUpgrade the A28 Acquisition MPU board firmware as follows:

Remove the Acquisition unit from the instrument.

Remove the A28 Acquisition MPU board from the Acquisition unit

(see Figure 6Ć1 for the exact location of these boards in the AcquisiĆ

tion unit).

Locate U611 on the A28 Acquisition MPU board (see Figure 6Ć28).

This board is located in the card cage.

Replace U611 on the A28 Acquisition MPU board.

The last twoĆdigit portion of the part number on the replacement IC

should be the same as, or higher than, that on the removed IC.

Ensure that pin 1 is oriented correctly.

ăStep 7:ăVerify the instrument serial number as follows:

Locate the manufacturing jumper, J860, on the A5 Time Base/ConĆ

troller board (see Figure 6Ć10), and install the terminal connector

link.

Connect a power cord to the instrument.

Connect a terminal or controller to the CSA 803C. Refer to the CSA

803C User Manual for more information on this connection.

Set the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH and ON/STANDBY switch to

ON.

Set necessary communication parameters; for example, baud rate.

After the instrument is poweredĆon, to establish communication from

the terminal or controller, enter the following commands (<CR> is

the return key):

e<CR>

v<CR>

Verify that the serial number on the instrument's front panel matches

the mainframe ID number in the Identify popĆup menu in the UTILĆ

ITY major menu.

If the numbers do not match, then enter the command:

uid main:BXXXXXX"<CR>

where XXXX corresponds to the serial number digits found on the

front panel serial number marker.

Verify that the proper ID is now displayed in the Identify popĆup

menu, in the Utility major menu.

6Ć72

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

ăStep 8:ăRemove the procedure setup as follows:

Set the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF.

Remove the J860 manufacturing jumper on the A5 Time Base/ConĆ

troller board.

Replace the bottom instrument cover, andset the instrument upĆ

right.

ăStep 9:ăPerform the final powerĆon andverification as follows:

NOTE

You must now perform the powerĆon sequence again for the instruĆ

ment to recognize the new manufacturing jumper configuration.

Set the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH andON/STANDBY switch to

ON.

Verify that the instrument powersĆon andsuccessfully completes the

SelfĆTest diagnostics.

NOTE

If problems are encountered, then check for the following:

ăall components are properly oriented in the sockets

ăall component pins are properly seated

ăcomponents are installed in the correct location

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Index

MultiĆPin Connectors

Cover

End Tabs

Index Bevel

Index

Retaining Clip

Socket

Index Spring

Mating Recesses

SlamĆPack IC

Index

Dual InĆLine Package IC

Note: Match the index triangle on the multiĆpin connectors with the

corresponding square pad on the circuit board.

Figure 6Ć32:ăMultiĆPin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor Indexing Diagram

6Ć74

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

Cabling diagrams are provided (in the Diagrams section) to show the interĆ

connecting cables between the various circuit boards, modules, and assemĆ

blies. Use these diagrams as a reference when you are removing and/or

replacing cables between these units.

Cables and

Connectors

Two methods of interconnection are used to electrically connect circuit

boards with other boards and components. When the interconnection is

made witha coaxial cable, a special endĆlead connector plugs into a socket

on the board. Other interconnections are made with a pin soldered into the

board.

Interconnecting Pins

Two types of connectors are used for these interconnecting pins. If the

connector is mounted on a plugĆon board, a special socket is soldered into

the board. If the connector is on the end of a lead, an endĆlead pin connecĆ

tor that mates with the interconnecting pin is used. The following information

provides the removal and replacement procedure for the various types of

interconnecting methods.

CoaxialĆType EndĆLead Connectors

Peltola and SMB connectors use color coding of wires, which may be helpful

to correlate a Peltola connector to its socket on a circuit board. The wire

insulation's color, or its colored stripe, is the same as the color represented

by the last digit of the JXX component number. (For example, a green wire

would connect to a J05 socket.) Other Peltola connectors may have labels

which designate their JXX component number.

MultiĆPin Connectors

These connectors are arranged so that the pin connectors used to connect

the wires to the interconnecting pins are clamped to the ends of the

associated leads.

Some of the pin connectors are grouped together and mounted in a plastic

holder. The overall result is that these connectors are installed and removed

as a multiĆpin connector.

Pin 1 on multiĆpin connectors is designated witha triangle (or arrowhead). A

triangle, dot, or square printed on circuit boards denotes pin 1. When a

connector is plugged onto a circuit board, the position or orientation of the

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

triangle on the multiĆpin holder is determined by the index (triangle, dot or

square) printed on the circuit board. Most boardĆmounted connectors have

a square pad for pin 1. (See Figure 6Ć32.)

NOTE

Match the index triangleson the multiĆpin connectorswith the

corresponding square pads on the circuit board.

Some multiĆpin connectorsare keyed by a gap between the pin 1

and 3 positions in the holder. (A small plastic plug covers the pin 2

position on the end of the holder.) There is a corresponding gap

between pins1 and 3 on the circuit board.

Align the plug in the multiĆpin holder with the gap between the

circuit board pins. The connector is then ready to be installed.

Many of the larger, multiĆpin ribbon connectors have a red, blue, or other

contrasting colorline along one side of theirattached wire cables. This line

indicates the location of pins 1 and 2 and also the location of the correĆ

sponding triangle index mark on the connector.

Some of the grayĆcolored ribbon cables may have the number of their

connectors stamped on them.

The ribbon connectors have the following two functions:

to provide a strain relief for the wire connections. The wire ribbon is

wrapped around a bar between the wire connections and the top of the

connector. Strain is then felt between the wires and the top of the conĆ

nector. This relieves most of the strain which would otherwise be felt on

the wire connections.

to provide a pullĆtab to ease disconnection. The pullĆtab is attached

inside the connector. When the tab is pulled, even pressure is applied

across the connector. The connector then separates from its holder

easily.

NOTE

To remove these ribbon connectors, grasp the pullĆtab (fastened

into the connector, if there) and pull it loose from the holder.

If there isn't a pullĆtab present in the connector, grasp the ends of

the connector, instead, and pull it straight out from the connector

socket.

6Ć76

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

After any FRU has been replaced, that particular unit should be checked.

Table 6Ć4 lists the required procedures to perform.

ChecksAfter FRU

Replacement

TableĂ6Ć4:ăChecksRequired After FRU Replacement

FRU Replaced

ChecksRequired

A1 Strobe Drive Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

Internal Clock

A3 M/F Power Connect

Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

A4 Regulator Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

Power Supply

Vertical Reference Voltage

Vertical Accuracy

System Vertical RMS Noise

Sweep Rate Accuracy

Triggering

A5 Time Base/Controller

Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

A8 CRT Driver Board

Display

A9 Touch Panel Assembly

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

A10 Front Panel Control

Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

A11 Front Panel Button

Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

A12 Rear Panel Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

A13 Mother Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

A14 Input/Output Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

Real Time Clock

A15 MMU Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

A17 Executive Processor

Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

A18 Memory Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corrective Maintenance

TableĂ6Ć4:ăChecks Required After FRU Replacement (Cont.)

FRU Replaced

Checks Required

A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer

Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

Sweep Rate Accuracy

Internal Clock

A20/A21 Head InterconĆ

nect (Power Only) Boards

Functional check of a powerĆonly device such

as an SDĆ42, SDĆ46, or SDĆ51 Sampling Head

A22/A23 Head InterconĆ

nect Boards

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Vertical Accuracy

System Vertical RMS Noise

A26 M/F Acquisition

Interconnect Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

Vertical Reference Voltage

A27 Acquisition Analog

Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

Vertical Accuracy

System Vertical RMS Noise

A28 Acquisition MPU

Board

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

Firmware ICs

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

Cathode Ray Tube (CRT)

Power Supply Module

Display

PowerĆOn Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics

Power Supply

Vertical Reference Voltage

Vertical Accuracy

System Vertical RMS Noise

Sweep Rate Accuracy

6Ć78

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

This section provides the information necessary to troubleshoot a faulty

CSA 803A to the fieldreplaceable unit (FRU) level. In most cases a FRU is a

circuit board. The primary means for troubleshooting is to use the error

index code output from the Kernel diagnostics and crossĆreference it to the

suspect circuit boards in the following tables, or to use the builtĆin FRU help

function available in Extended Diagnostics. In addition, conventional troubleĆ

shooting techniques are describedat the endof this section to help identify

a faulty A4 Regulator board, CRT, Power Supply module, A13 Mother board,

or A8 CRT Driver board.

Each subsystem processor (Executive, Display, Time Base, andAcquisition)

executes a set of Kernel diagnostics prior to the SelfĆTest diagnostics. After

the Acquisition processor has verifiedits support circuitry, it tries to establish

communication with the Time Base processor. After the Time Base procesĆ

sor has verifiedits critical support circuitry, andafter it has attemptedto

communicate with the Acquisition processor, the Time Base processor

attempts to communicate with the Executive processor. Likewise, the DisĆ

play processor attempts to communicate with the Executive processor after

successfully executing its Kernel diagnostics.

Diagnostics Overview

After a processor has successfully completedits Kernel diagnostics and

establishedcommunications with the next order processor (for example,

AcquisitionĆtoĆTime Base andTime BaseĆtoĆExecutive), then SelfĆTest diagĆ

nostics execute to verify the more global functionality of the processor's

hardware system. After all the SelfĆTest diagnostics are executed, any failĆ

ures cause the CSA 803C to enter ExtendedDiagnostics andto display the

error index codes in a diagnostic menu. Extended diagnostics contains tests

which are a superset of the SelfĆTest.

The Kernel diagnostics (lowĆlevel SelfĆTest diagnostics) and SelfĆTest/ExĆ

tended Diagnostics produce and format error index codes differently, so

they are covered separately. Kernel diagnostics error index codes for each

subsystem are producedandreadquite differently from each other.

Note that some of these tests that may indicate faulty FRU(s) are not

executed automatically during the SelfĆTest diagnostics (that is, some errors

codes are only generated by manually selecting tests or Extended DiagnosĆ

tics).

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

Kernel diagnostics are executed each time the front panel ON/STANDBY

switch is set to ON. The CSA 803C performs powerĆon diagnostics on its

microprocessor subsystems and SelfĆTest diagnostics on all of its major

circuits.

Kernel Diagnostics

When Kernel diagnostics begin, the messages Diagnostics in Progress

and Comm Test in Progress are displayed. If the CSA 803C is poweredĆon

from a cold condition, then the diagnostics may complete before the CRT is

warmed up and able to display these messages.

Diagnostic routines are performed in parallel on each of the instrument's

processor subsystems: Display, Executive, Time Base, and Acquisition.

Following successful execution of their Kernel diagnostics, the Acquisition

processor attempts to communicate with the Time Base processor and the

Time Base and Display processors attempt to communicate with the ExecuĆ

tive processor.

The Executive processor will continue SelfĆTest diagnostics even if it is the

only processor that has successfully completed its Kernel diagnostics.

In the case where the Display processor has not communicated successfully

with the Executive processor, the message indicating that SelfĆTest diagnosĆ

tics are beginning will not appear on the screen. Kernel diagnostic failures

may be indicated by the message, Dsy Kernel Failure, or Comm Test in

Progress on the screen and/or a single highĆlow beep and illuminated

menu buttons.

If either the Display, Time Base, or Acquisition processors do not successfulĆ

ly pass their communications stage, then the CSA 803C automatically enters

Extended Diagnostics at the end of the SelfĆTest diagnostics. If the Display

processor is at fault, then the Extended Diagnostic menu will not appear on

the screen.

The Kernel diagnostic tests execute concurrently in all three subsystem

processor circuits at powerĆon. Hardware critical to diagnostic operation is

verified, such as ROM, RAM, DMAs, timers, and interrupt control circuitry.

For the Executive Processor, this requires checking basic operation for most

boards in the card cage (that is, those boards plugged in to the A13 Mother

board). The last step of Kernel diagnostics for the Display, Time Base, and

Acquisition processors is to verify communication. Within each processor, all

Kernel diagnostics must execute without failures before the SelfĆTest diagĆ

nostics can execute. However, the Executive processor continues with its

SelfĆTest diagnostics despite a communication failure encountered with the

Display and/or Time Base processors; additionally, the Time Base processor

does not halt when it has a communication failure with the Acquisition

processor.

Since the condition of the instrument is unknown at powerĆon, when a kernel

failure occurs, Kernel diagnostics in the Executive, Time Base, and AcquisiĆ

tion processors do not attempt to display error index codes. Instead, these

processors generate hexidecimal (hex) numbers that are read as a series of

binary bits, such as XXX1 0101 (hex error code 15 ) for the Executive

hex

processor, 0100 (hex error code 4 ) for the Time Base processor, or

hex

6Ć80

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

10 (hex error code 2 ) for the Acquisition processor, from either internal

hex

test points or LEDs. Refer to Tables 6Ć10, 6Ć15, and 6Ć16 for more informaĆ

tion and examples of these hex error codes.

The Display kernel diagnostics display an error message on the screen

giving the name of the test that failed. For example, the following message

indicates that the DMA 0 test failed:

Dsy Kernel Failure

DMA 0

If the error message does not appear on the screen, the error index code

can be obtained from the status LEDs and pins on the A15 Memory ManĆ

agement Unit board (see Figure 6Ć32).

Refer to the PowerĆOn Diagnostics procedure for information about SelfĆTest/

Extended Diagnostics.

SelfĆTest/Extended

Diagnostics

Extended Diagnostics Menu Structure

The menu structure determines the format of the error index codes. The

Extended Diagnostics menus are in a fourĆlevel hierarchy with the Subsys

(that is, the Subsystem) menu at the highest level. This fourĆlevel SubsysĆ

tem, Block, Area, and Routine menu hierarchy generates the error index

codes. Each subsystem in the Subsystem menu can be selected and tested

if there are functional processor(s) and communication paths. Each subsysĆ

tem is broken into a number of parts, or circuit blocks, in the Block menu for

the selected subsystem. In a similar manner, each block is broken into a

number of circuit areas in the Area menu, the third level. The fourth and

lowest menu level is the Routine menu, which contains the smallest test unit

that can be selected and executed.

Extended Diagnostics Error Index Codes

The error index codes for the Extended Diagnostics are fiveĆdigit codes

whose first character indicates the subsystem tested. The last four digits are

hexadecimal ( ) numbers that indicate the Block, Area, Routine, and

hex

specific failure mode. For example, E2321 is decoded as follows:

Subsystem Ċ Executive

Block name Ċ Front Panel

Area name Ċ Soft Keys

Routine name Ċ Column Open

Failure Identity Ċ specific failure mode

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

Table 6Ć5 lists the subsystem characters ofthe Extended Diagnostic error

index codes.

TableĂ6Ć5:ăExtended Diagnostics Error Index Code Descriptions

Description

Meaning

Executive

Display

Time Base

Mainframe Acquisition

Front panel controls are active during the SelfĆTest diagnostics sequence;

any disturbance may cause a test failure, forcing the CSA 803C into the

Extended Diagnostics mode. Touch the (E)Exit label twice in succession to

remove the Extended Diagnostics menu and resume normal operation. In

situations where the Display, Time Base, or Acquisition processors have

failed their kernel diagnostics, exiting diagnostics to normal operation will

not be possible.

After the SelfĆTest/Extended Diagnostic programs have executed, any resulĆ

tant error index codes appear on the display next to the associated subsysĆ

tem name in the Extended Diagnostics menu. Each subsystem that had a

failure gives the first error encountered and the number of failures in the

subsystem.

To get a more complete list ofthe error index codes in a subsystem, touch

the selector ofa failed subsystem (ifthe failed subsystem is not already

selected) and then touch the Block selector. Touching the Area and then

Routine selectors shows the lowest level test routines in the selected Block.

The currently selected Subsystem, Block, Area, and Routine are shown

below their labels at the bottom ofthe Extended Diagnostics menu. Several

function and operating mode selectors are also available at the bottom of

the screen. When certain test routines are selected, some ofthese operating

modes are nonĆselectable. Additionally, when some ofthe operating modes

are set to certain states, some ofthe test routines may become nonĆselectĆ

able.

The function and mode operators are the following:

(?)Help Ċ displays a list ofFRUs for the currently selected routine. Ifthe

routine had a failure, then the error index code for that routine is also

displayed. The FRUs are normally listed as the mostĆtoĆleast probable

cause for errors in the routine. In some cases, the FRUs are listed acĆ

cording to their easeĆofĆreplaceability in order to minimize the time

required to identify the faulty FRU.

Within this menu, you can scan forward to the next routine or to the next

failure by touching the appropriate selectors in the lower portion of the

screen (which functions like a simple keypad). Scanning continues in a

circular fashion through all available subsystems.

6Ć82

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

Upon exiting this menu, the instrument returns to the same menu level

(that is, Subsystem, Block, Area, or Routine) that it was at before the

help function was invoked. However, the displayed menu may be differĆ

ent if any scanning was performed.

(-)Delete Ċ places an execution mark on the currently selected menu

name (in the upper menu area) and all items beneath it, down to the

Routine level. This inhibits the actual execution of these routines, when

(r)Run is invoked.

Visually, execution marks are displayed on the screen as an asterisk (*)

immediately to the left of the menu name (in the upper menu area). If

one, but not all, menu names in a menu are marked with an asterisk,

then the name of the menu at the next highest level (that is, from Area to

Block) is preceded by an execution mark of a minus (-).

(+)Add Ċ removes the execution mark, if present, on the currently

selected menu name and all execution marks on items (that is, blocks,

areas, or routines) below the currently selected menu name (down to

the Routine level). The execution mark, if present, will change from an

asterisk (*) or minus (-) to a space.

(D)Debugger Ċ normally cannot be selected and is used by qualified

service personnel only.

E(Exit) Ċ terminates Extended Diagnostics and returns the instrument

to normal operating mode, but only if this selector is touched twice in

succession. The first touch causes a confirmation prompt to appear at

the top of the screen; the second touch causes the actual termination of

the Extended Diagnostics.

(p)Loop Ċ toggles On and Off. When On, the selected test(s) is

executed continuously with the number of iterations displayed.

(t)Terse Ċ toggles On and Off. When On, tests in the loop mode

execute at the fastest rate, but the iteration (i.e. Loop) readout is not

updated until the test is stopped (by touching the screen or a button).

(x)All Ċ toggles On and Off. When On, all tests in the current menu are

selected to execute when started.

(s)Stopon Err Ċ toggles On and Off. When On, testing stops after the

first failed test completes.

(r)Run/(q)Quit Ċ starts or stops the currently selected tests.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

The upper portion of the display screen is used to display diagnostic menus.

Menus are comprised of menu items and menu fields. Menu items are rows

of items that can be selected, while menu fields are columns of status inĆ

formation.

Diagnostic Menus

There are four tiers of menus which may appear in the menu area (only one

is present at any given time): the Subsystem, Block, Area and Routine

menus. Upon entry into any menu, there is always one menu item that is

selected. And, only one menu item can be selected at any given time.

The following field descriptions apply for Subsystem, Block, Area and RouĆ

tine menus.

Subsystem, Block and Area menus are divided into the following four fields:

Execution Mark, Title, Error Index Code, and Failure Count. The Routine

menu has these and three additional test result fields.

Execution Mark Ċ is a one character field preceding the Title field and

succeeding the keystroke selector identification. The three values of this

field and their meanings are as follows:

` '

All routines in this Subsystem, Block, or Area are available for

execution

`*'

`-'

No routines in the Subsystem, Block, or Area are available for

execution

One or more routines in the Subsystem, Block, or Area are

available for execution

Refer to the Delete and Add descriptions for further information.

Title field Ċ contains the name of individual hardware Subsystems,

Blocks, Areas, or Routines.

Error Index Code field Ċ contains an index code. The index field may

contain one of five types of status (indicating one of four types of tests),

providing the following information:

pass"

An automatic test has executed and did not fail.

Yxxxx"

A test has failed and the failure encountered in subsysĆ

tem Y is xxxx. This index code contains one digit each

for Subsystem identification, Block identification, Area

identification, Routine identification, and a Test identifiĆ

cation that gives some specific information about the

failure.

****"

An automatic test has not yet been executed. When the

test does execute, the test will provide pass or Yxxxx

failure status.

- - - -"

The test requires you to perform some type of test setĆ

up using the RSĆ232ĆC loopback connector. When

executed, this status provides pass or Yxxxx failure

status. To execute this test, you must select it.

6Ć84

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

" (blank)

This status indicates that the test requires action from

the user (such as the front panel verification tests), or

that thetest is for stimulus only (such as themanual

calibration tests). This status does not provide failure

status. To execute this test, select it individually.

????"

This status indicates that an option was found that was

not present in the current instrument configuration or

that a subsystem was found that did not have a workĆ

ing communication path.

Failure Count field Ċ indicates the total number of routine failures (one

per routine) currently encountered in the Subsystem, Block, or Area.

Thus, theFailureCount will never bemorethan thetotal number of

routines in the subsystem. If no tests have been executed or no failures

haveoccurred, then this field is blank. Sincethefailurecount field is an

indication of all routines that havefailures, it is possibleto havea failure

field count greater than the loop count (for example, there may be five

routine failures after the first loop).

A field display of 65535+ indicates that the Failure Count field has gone

beyond 65534 and that an overflow condition has occurred.

The following field descriptions apply only to Routine menus.

Test Results fields Ċ contain information useful for troubleshooting.

Oneof thefollowing formats is used:

test address, expected data, and actual data

expected data lower bound (minimum), expected data upper bound

(maximum) and actual data

Diagnostic Menu Hardcopy

Press thehardcopy button on thefront panel to makehardcopy of a diagĆ

nostic menu. The hardcopy is sent to a printer attached to the PRINTER

port. Screen hardcopies can also be obtained from other menus (for examĆ

ple, help menus, interactive test menus, and hardware debugger menus).

After a hardcopy is output, a Form Feed is issued to the printer. If no printer

is attached or the printer can not print (for example, if the printer is off line or

if the printer is out of paper,) then the following warning is shown in the

Input/Prompt area:

Hardcopy absent or off line.

The hardcopy function is unavailable for some tests requiring human interĆ

action, such as touch panel interactive tests, various display tests, and

CRT/touch panel calibration patterns.

The knobs control the screen intensity during the four main diagnostics

menu levels. The TOUCH PANEL ON/OFF button enables/disables the touch

panel from responding to user touches.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

The RSĆ232ĆC port drives a terminal which conforms to the ANSI 3.64 stanĆ

dard. In this mode, the terminal provides a screenĆdriven, interactive human

interface.

Diagnostic Terminal

Mode (RSĆ232ĆC)

This mode is useful when either the display or touch panel is not functioning

properly, or when it is desired to remotely use the diagnostics with a modem

and phone link.

There are several single terminal keystroke commands which are equivalent

to front panel buttons or are terminalĆonly commands, all of which do not

appear on any of the display screens. The following terminal keystrokes do

appear on the screen and are shown in quotes:

`B'<baud rate><cr> Ċ this keystroke, followed by the baud rate and

carriage return) allows you to change the default baud rate to any one of

the allowable product baud rates (300, 1200, 9600, 19200). The default

powerĆup baud rate is determined from the position of two internal

jumpers located on the A14 I/O board. (The Default setting is for 9600

baud.)

`T' Ċ this keystroke toggles the screen output between the current

screen display and an ANSI compatible terminal. The terminal should

initially be set in its ANSI mode.

`K' Ċ this keystroke toggles the screen output between the current

screen display and a Tektronix 4x05 terminal (4105, 4205).

`L' Ċ this keystroke toggles the screen output between the current

screen display and a Tektronix 4x07 terminal (4107, 4207).

`H' Ċ this keystroke produces a hardcopy of the current diagnostic

menu as described earlier.

`O' Ċ this keystroke disables/enables the touch panel from responding

to the user's touches. It is equivalent to the TOUCH PANEL ON/OFF

button.

`Q' Ċ this keystroke, when used in interactive test menus, stops and

starts the display information in the keypad prompt area. This keystroke

is equivalent to the ACQUISITION RUN/STOP button in those menus.

To gain access to the terminal mode diagnostics, the instrument must be in

the Extended Diagnostic mode.

To exit the terminal mode, either recycle the power, enter the (Exit) keystroke

twice to begin normal operation, or enter the appropriate `L', `T', or `K'

keystroke to transfer the screen output back to the instrument display.

6Ć86

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DiagnosticTroubleshooting

The SelfĆTest diagnostics and Extended Diagnostics are accessible using the

two commands listed in Table 6Ć6.

System Mode

(GPIB & RSĆ232ĆC)

TableĂ6Ć6:ăSystem Mode Commands

Header

TEST

Argument

Notes

SetĆonly

QueryĆonly

[XTND]

[MAN]

TEST

DIAG?

The TEST command invokes SelfĆTest diagnostics or Extended Diagnostic

execution. The TEST command without arguments initiates SelfĆTest diagĆ

nostics. The TEST command with argument XTND initiates Extended DiagĆ

nostics.

Refer to the CSA 803C and 11801B Programmer Manual for moreinformaĆ

tion on TEST and DIAG command syntax and usage.

The return of one of two event codes listed in Table 6Ć7 to the GPIB and

RSĆ232ĆC ports signals that diagnostic testing is complete.

TableĂ6Ć7:ăEvent Code Descriptions

Event Code

Explanation

460

SelfĆTest or Extended Diagnostics were completed sucĆ

cessfully

394

SelfĆTest or Extended Diagnostics were completed and

failed

In either case, a GPIB/RSĆ232ĆC controller may obtain pass/fail information

through the DIAG? query.

The TEST command with argument MAN initiates the Extended Diagnostics

similarly to entering Extended Diagnostics through the front panel UTILITY

menu. Theprimary useof this command is to providetheremoteoperator a

convenient way of accessing the diagnostics through the normal RSĆ232ĆC

interfaceso that theoperator can usetheDiagnostic Terminal Modeto do

remote testing.

CAUTION

The TEST command with argument MAN violatesnormal GPIB

protocols in that, when used, the instrument becomes nonĆresponĆ

sive to further GPIB commandsuntil normal operation isresumed.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

The DIAG? query returns pass/fail information from the most recent invocaĆ

tion of SelfĆTest diagnostics or Extended Diagnostics. Examples of possible

responses and explanations, are as follows:

DIAG PASSED: NONE

This response indicates that the SelfĆTest diagnostics or Extended DiagnosĆ

tic operation did not detect any test faults.

DIAG FAILED: E1311, E1711, E1721, E1731

This response indicates that the Extended Diagnostic operation detected

test faults.

DIAG FAILED: E1311, D1211, T1431

This response indicates that the SelfĆTest diagnostics or Extended DiagnosĆ

tic operation detected test faults.

DIAG BYPASSED

This response indicates that a powerĆon has occurred and that SelfĆTest

diagnostics were bypassed through a jumper on the A14 I/O board.

6Ć88

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

The CSA 803C holds four lithium batteries to provide power when the instruĆ

ment is turned off. The following discussions provide criteria for determining

if a battery has exceeded its lifetime, and is thus causing incorrect instruĆ

ment operation. (A battery's lifetime will typically exceed five years.) If the

battery voltage measures (at 20_ C) equal to or greater than the voltages

listed in this section, then the circuit should operate correctly from 0_ C to

50_ C. (These voltage measurements are taken with the instrument power

off.)

Battery Testing

Battery BT130 provides power for the real time clock on the A14 I/O board. If

theclock begins to losetimerapidly when theinstrument is turned off or the

diagnostics report that the Real Time Clk (E42XX) has failed, the battery

should be tested. If the battery voltage measures less than 2.7 V, then the

most likely sourceof theproblem is thebattery and you should follow the

instructions for battery disposal earlier in this section.

Battery BT150 provides power for the nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) on the

A18 Memory board. If the diagnostics consistently reports an NVRAM

Battery (E141X) failure over multiple powerĆons, then the battery should be

tested. If the battery voltage measures less than 2.7 V, then the most likely

sourceof theproblem is thebattery and you should follow theinstructions

for battery disposal earlier in this section.

Sockets for devices U500 and U511 provide power for the NVRAM on the

A5 Time Base/Controller board. If the diagnostics consistently report a Static

RAM Battery (T1331) failure over multiple powerĆons, then the batteries

should be tested. If either one of the battery voltages measures less than

2.1 V, as measured on pin 28 (Vcc), follow the instructions for battery disĆ

posal earlier in this section. (It is recommended that both batteries be reĆ

placed at thesametime.)

NOTE

Turning the instrument off while Extended Diagnostics is executing

one of the NVRAM memory tests may cause failure of the NVRAM

battery test. If the diagnostics report an NVRAM battery failure, then

exit the diagnostics. This will rewrite the confidence words into the

NVRAM. Turn off the instrument for at least one hour. Then, turn the

instrument back on. If the diagnostics still indicate an NVRAM

battery failure, then the battery should be tested.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

Before a powerĆup SelfĆTest begins Ċ but just after the Executive processor

has run its Kernel Diagnostics Ċ the front panel buttons are scannedby the

Executive processor. If the Executive processor senses that the WAVEFORM

andTRIGGER buttons, andonly these two buttons, are pressedin (i.e.,

closed) during this time, then the Executive processor resets its NVRAM to a

default state, the Teksecure Erase Memory function. This essentially deĆ

stroys all storedsettings andstoredtraces in NVRAM. When this occurs, the

NVRAM is initializedby filling all but a few locations with a default value. The

following items are left intact after the NVRAM is reset:

Clearing NVRAM

Number of instrument powerĆons (POWERON?)

Instrument power on time (UPTIME?)

Mainframe serial number (UID? MAIN)

This section correlates Kernel Diagnostic error index codes with the compoĆ

nents or boards suspected of causing each error. The suspect FRU(s) for

SelfĆTest/Extended Diagnostics error index codes are identified by using the

builtĆin FRU help function (?)Help, described under SelfĆTest/Extended

Diagnostics.

Field Replaceable

Unit (FRU) Guide

The FRU(s) in the Suspect boardcategory in the following error index tables

are listed in mostĆtoĆleast probable cause order. If any diagnostic errors

occur, inspect the suspect FRU for loose connections andcomponents.

Then, repeat the Diagnostic test. If any diagnostic errors occur again, reĆ

place the suspect FRU(s) with a known goodFRU or FRUs. Check that the

new FRU is configuredexactly like the oldone andthat any installedfirmĆ

ware matches the version in the oldFRU.

The error index codes and tests are divided into four groups based on the

four processor subsystems: Executive, Display, Time Base, andAcquisition.

Each subsystem group has a table of kernel diagnostic error index codes. In

addition, the Executive has a table of manual test error index codes, which

help extendthe confidence level of instrument functionality.

If necessary, kernel error index codes for the Executive and Display can be

readas TTL logic levels on circuit boardpins using a logic probe.

6Ć90

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

FRU Name Abbreviations

Abbreviations of FRU names are listed in Table 6Ć8.

TableĂ6Ć8:ăBoard FRUs

FRU

Board

Board No

(A1)

STROBEDR

MFPOWERR

REG

M/F Strobe Drive board

M/F Power Connect board

Regulator board

(A3)

(A4)

TBC

Time Base/Controller board

CRT Socket board

(A5)

CRTSOC

CRTDR

TOUCH

FPCTRL

FPBUT

(A7)

CRT Driver board

(A8)

Touch Panel assembly

Front Panel Control board

Front Panel Button board

Rear Panel assembly

Mother board

(A9)

(A10)

(A11)

(A12)

(A13)

(A14)

(A15)

(A17)

(A18)

(A19)

REAR

MOTHER

Input/Output board

MMU

Memory Management Unit board

Executive Processor board

Memory board

EXP

MEM

STROBEBUF

HEAD

Strobe/TDR Buffer board

Head Interconnect (Power Only) board

Head Interconnect board

(A20/A21)

(A22/A23)

(A27)

HEAD

ACQANALOG

ACQMPU

MFACQCON

Acquisition Analog board

Acquisition MPU board

(A28)

M/F Acquisition Interconnect board

(A26)

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

Component and Module Name Abbreviations

Abbreviations of component and modules names are listed in Table 6Ć9.

TableĂ6Ć9:ăComponent Module FRUs

FRU

CRT

Board

Cathode Ray Tube

Executive, Display, Time Base, or Acquisition Firmware

Serial Data Interface IC

Lithium Battery

SDI

BATTERY

Power Supply Module

NOTE

The Executive, Display, Time Base, and Acquisition firmware is

packaged in a single firmware (FW) kit; the individual parts are not

available as separate components.

6Ć92

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

Executive Subsystem Error Codes

Error index codes for the Executive subsystem are listed in Table 6Ć10 along

with the suspected FRUs.

TableĂ6Ć10:ăExecutive Processor Kernel Error Index Codes

Error Index

Hybrid/IC FRUs

Suspect Board FRUs

MEM, EXP

MEM

hex

1F - 1D

1C - 19

18 - 16

IO, EXP

EXP

EXP, MEM

FPCTRL, IO, MPU

IO, EXP

10 - 0E

REAR, IO, MPU

MMU, EXP

EXP, MEM

REAR, IO, EXP

Bit patterns for the hexadecimal error index codes listed in Table 6Ć10 are

displayed with the front panel MENUS LEDs in bottomĆtoĆtop bit order. The

STORE/RECALL label represents the MSB (most significant bit) and the

WAVEFORM label represents the LSB (least significant bit). When lit, the

LEDs represent a one.

For example, error index code 12

GER LEDs to light.

causes the STORE/RECALL and TRIGĆ

hex

The status LEDs (DS306 and DS307) on the A17 Executive Processor board

will flash while the Kernel diagnostic tests are executing. If a kernel failure is

detected, then one or both LEDs will remain on. Table 6Ć11 lists the various

LED configurations and their significance.

Reading the Executive processor subsystem error bits from the A17 ExecuĆ

tive Processor board test points TP201 (MSB) to TP205 (LSB) is also posĆ

sible. See Figure 6Ć33 for the location of these test points and status LEDs.

The bits are high (+5 V) true.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć93

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

TableĂ6Ć11:ăExecutive Processor Status LED Configuration

DS307

DS306

Significance

PowerĆOn

OFF

Kernel Tests Executing

Kernel Tests Failed

Kernel Tests Finished

OFF

TP201

(MSB)

TP205

(LSB)

GND

+5V

DS307

DS306

Figure 6Ć33:ăA17 Executive Processor Board Test Point and Status LED Locations

Table 6Ć12 lists the Executive processor manual tests and verification proceĆ

dures. If the conditions specified in the verification procedure listed are not

met, then the suspect FRUs can be found using the (?) Help function.

These tests are performed manually and produce no error index code

displays. They are included to help you locate faulty boards that the Kernel

or SelfĆTest diagnostics possibly did not locate. Interconnections such as the

A13 Mother boards cables and the power supply boards are not listed;

however, these interconnections are considered as possible problem

sources.

6Ć94

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

TableĂ6Ć12:ăExecutive Processor Manual Tests

Test

VerificationProcedure

Front Panel

Verify

ąHard Keys

This test allows you to interactively press the hard keys

to verify their operation. This test verifies the operation

of a key with both visual and audio feedback.

This test requires operator interaction and can be

executed only in the Routine popĆup menu with the All

and Loop modes set to Off. Once this test is invoked,

you can press any of the hard keys on the instrument

and verify that the corresponding image of the key on

the screen is highlighted, that the associated LED is

turned on, and that an audio click is generated.

ąSoft Keys

This test allows you to interactively touch any of the soft

keys and verify their operation. This test verifies the opĆ

eration of a key with both visual and audio feedback.

This test requires operator interaction and can be

executed only in the Routine popĆup menu with the All

and Loop modes set to Off. Once this test is invoked,

you can touch any of the soft keys in the instrument and

verify that a touch box is drawn around the soft key on

the screen and that an audio click is generated.

ąKnobs

This test allows you to turn either of the knobs and

verify their operation. This test verifies knob movement

with visual feedback.

This test requires operator interaction and can be

executed only in the Routine popĆup menu with the All

and Loop modes set to Off. Once this test is invoked,

you can turn either of the knobs on the instrument and

verify that the corresponding knob pointer on the

screen rotates and that the associated counter value

changes.

Test Pattern

ąGray Scale

ąGreen Grid

ąWhite Grid

ąRed Display

ąGreen Display

ąBlue Display

ąHV Reg Disply

These tests allow you to examine and adjust the CRT

color.

These tests require operator interaction and are only

executable in the Routine popĆup menu with the All

and Loop modes set to Off. Once one of the tests is

invoked, you can examine/adjust the CRT by following

the procedure outlined in the Adjustments section.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć95

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

TableĂ6Ć12:ăExecutive Processor Manual Tests (Cont.)

VerificationProcedure

Test

Internal I/O

Tone Gen

ąRamp Tone

This test verifies the capability of the instrument to genĆ

erate tones through its internal speaker.

This test requires operator interaction and can be

executed only in the Routine popĆup menu with the

Loop mode set to On and the Terse and All mode set

to Off. After invoking this test, you should verify that a

highĆspeed clicking sound occurs.

Real Time Clk

ąCalibrate

This test allows you to checkand adjust the Real Time

Clockperiod.

This test requires operator interaction and can be

executed only in the Routine popĆup menu with the All

and Loop modes set to Off. Once this test is invoked,

you can examine/adjust the real time clockperiod folĆ

lowing the procedure outlined in the Real Time Clock

procedure in the Adjustments section.

External I/O

Printer

ąPattern

This test prints a set of patterns (all printable ASCII

characters) to help you verify the external printer interĆ

face.

This test requires operator interaction and can be

executed only in the Routine popĆup menu with the All

mode set to Off. Before executing this test, you should

connect a CentronicsĆcompatible printer to the PRINTĆ

ER connector on the rear panel of the instrument.

RSĆ232

ąExtern Loop

This test verifies parts of the external RSĆ232ĆC interĆ

face.

This test requires operator interaction and can be

executed only in the Routine popĆup menu with the All

mode set to Off. Before executing this test, you should

plug an external loopbackconnector on the RSĆ232ĆC

connector on the rear panel of the instrument.

6Ć96

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

TableĂ6Ć12:ăExecutive Processor Manual Tests (Cont.)

Test

Verification Procedure

GPIB

ąInrpt Reset

ąReset Status

ąData Lines

ąInterrupt

These tests verify the Executive processor interface to

the internal GPIB circuitry. The major external GPIB

functions are not tested.

This test requires operator interaction and can be

executed only in the Routine popĆup menu with the All

and Loop modes set to Off. Before executing this test,

you should disconnect the GPIB connector from the

instrument.

Display Subsystem Error Index Codes

The Display subsystem error index codes and suspect FRUs are listed in

Table 6Ć13.

TableĂ6Ć13:ăDisplay Processor Kernel Error Index Codes

Error Index

Suspect Hybrid/

IC FRUs

Suspect Board FRUs

hex

1 - 4

5 - 7

MMU

The name of the first Display kernel test that fails is displayed on the screen.

The Display processor error index code is read from the A15 MMUboard

test points DIAG0 (LSB) to DIAG2 (MSB). The bits are high (+5 V) true.

The status LEDs (DS201 and DS200) on the A15 MMUboard will flash while

the Kernel diagnostic tests are executing. If a kernel failure is detected, then

one or both LEDs will remain on. Table 6Ć14 lists the various LED configuraĆ

tions and their significance. See Figure 6Ć34 for the location of these test

points and status LEDs.

TableĂ6Ć14:ăDisplay Processor Status LED Configuration

DS200

DS201

Significance

PowerĆOn

OFF

Kernel Tests Executing

Kernel Tests Failed

Kernel Tests Finished

OFF

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

DS200

DS201

DIAG 2

(MSB)

DIAG 0

(LSB)

Figure 6Ć34:ăA15 MMU Board Test Point and Status LED Locations

Time Base Processor Error Index Codes

Error index codes for the Time Base processor are listed in Table 6Ć15.

TableĂ6Ć15:ăTime Base Processor Kernel Error Index Codes

Error Index

Suspect Hybrid/

IC FRUs

Suspect Board FRUs

hex

TBC

2 - 3

4 - 7

8 - A

TBC

TBC, MMU

TBC

TBC, MMU

The error index code bits of the first Time Base kernel test that fails are read

from the A5 Time Base/Controller boardstatus LEDs ST4 (MSB), ST3, ST2

andST1 (LSB). The bits are true (one) when the LED is on. Also, status

LEDs ST5 andST6 indicate when the test is executing andwhen the test

has failed, respectively. See Figure 6Ć35 for the location of these status

LEDs.

The patterns from the status LEDs are applicable only when the Time Base

is executing or stoppedin Kernel diagnostics.

6Ć98

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

U1000

C1413

R710

C800

R803

R802

R801

R800

J91

U700

U701

U100

U200

U300

U400

U501

U500

R901

R900

R1402

C1001

C3702

U901

R1000

C1000

C901

C902

R810

E901

E902

U801

R1001

R1002

U1001

U1200

U1510

R1003

R1004

MH400

R1005

J902

R3841

R3911

MH100

J903

R1324

R1323

C1511

C1004

C1003

U702

U710

C3841

C811

R1210

R1302

U1010

U1011

U1110

J1320

C1223

C1326

CR1210

U1210

C812

U1310

U1312

C110

C210

C410

C510

C511

C610

U610

C710

U711

C310

C1214

U1211

C130C11302

U1311

J15

J32

U910

U911

U810

C810

U820

J16

C3202

C3301

C1501

R1010

R1011

C1216

C1320

U1332

R1345

C1111

C1220

C1010

U3061

U1220

C1020

C920

U920

R3304

U51430

14 15

C921

U930

U3020

R720

2224

U1021

U3060

U1121

16 17

C1560

R3704

16 17

2224

1921

U830

U831

U1320

1921

2325

TP1371

2325

C530

SH100

C3700C3211

R3321

R3322

R3323 C3214

U3032

J1570

R1313

R1312

C1321

U1330

U3050

U3021

C330

R1130

U1040 U1140

U1570

J730

J830

C1130

R1356

R1359

R730

C740

R840

C840

C830

U841

R930

U940

C440

U941

U1041

C640

U640

C741

U741

R4002

R4001

CR4001

R3211

R3215

R3212

L3500

U740

U840

U3014

C3305

C1561

C141

C240

U1630

16 17

R1474

J30A

Q4005

CR4005

R4005

R4006

U3081

U440

C3310

R3312

C140

U150

1921

2325

C3530

SH500

R1150

R1570

R1573

U240

C650

U651

C750

U750

C751

U751

C850

U850

C851

U851

C950

U950

C1050

C1150

R3135

C951

C1051

R3318

C3312

U1460

R3223

SH200

U3013

U951

U1050

U1150

U1151

28 26

R450

C1213

R3801

R350

6 3

U1581

R351

R352

R353

U53031

TP550

TP551

TP552

10 22

DS156

J450

U551

U650

13151720

TP251

16 17

U3080

2224

TP250

J451

C250

20 27

TP553

TP554

TP555

TP556

C1611

R3131

C3110

12141618

DS157

C160

R150

C161

TP260

TP360

1921 25

C260

U260

R260

U360

C360

U361

R3137

J24A

J25A

J24B

J25B

J29A

J860

J861

R3132

R3113

R660

C660

R760

C761

R761

C760

U161

U250

R3111

U3052

U53051

C460

C860

U860

C961

U961

C1061

C1060

C1161

C1160

C960

U960

R570

J24D

16 17

2224

U3011

U460

U760

U560

U561

U660

U661

U761

U1060

U1061

U1160

U1161

U3056

1921

2325

R3513

J25D

J24C

C370

U371

C270

U370

R3514

L3510

C170

R170

R270

TP770 TP772

TP270

R3561

C1270

C470

SH700

R3112

C3112

C3160

TP771

U770

R3516

R3506

U1252

J35

TP870

U870

R670

R970

R1070

TP1070

SH300

C570

U580

C571

U581

2826242220

U3015

R580

TP584

TP1071

U970

U971

R3151

U771

C1211

C1071

U1080

C1170

U1180

C1171

U1181

U3016

J25C

C1070

R480

U481

C680

TP580

TP581

R1472

R980

C381

U380

C380

U381

TP1471

R1473

U1081

U881

U480

C780

U780

U680

U1371

R1252

R1631

TP582

R590

TP1570

TP583

U582

U880

U981

U980

U583

TP585

U790

F1180

U1480

C1381

TP980

TP981

TP982

TP983

C1283

U1280

C1371

C1190

C1481

C490

U490

C491

U491

TP586

TP1370

MH200

R1090

C1191

C1292 C1392 C1490

C1280

R1091

MH300

C190

U190

C290

U290

C390

C391

U1380

C392

U391

TP984

TP1090

R890

C890

C1090

J18

L1291

L1290

L1292

R1190

C1290

C1192

C1291

R690

C1391

C1390

U390

DS1190

U191

SH600

TP591

TP590

C1293

C492

C493

J83

R190

R390

J23

ST1 (LSB) ST2

ST3 ST4 (MSB)

ST5 (Test Running) ST6 (Test Failed)

Status LEDs

Figure 6Ć35:ăA5 Time Base/Controller Board Status LEDs

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć99

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Diagnostic Troubleshooting

Acquisition Processor Error Index Codes

Error index codes for the Acquisition processor are listed in Table 6Ć16.

TableĂ6Ć16:ăAcquisition Processor Kernel Error Index Codes

Error Index

Suspect Hybrid/

IC FRUs

Suspect Board FRUs

hex

ACQMPU

ACQMPU, TBC, STROBEDR,

MFACQCON

The error index code bits of the first Acquisition kernel test that fails are read

from the A28 Acquisition MPU board status LEDs, DS101 (MSB) and DS100

(LSB). See Figure 6Ć36 for the location of these status LEDs.

The patterns from the status LEDs are applicable only when the Acquisition

is executing or stopped in Kernel diagnostics.

Status LEDs

DS100(LSB)

DS101(MSB)

Figure 6Ć36:ăA28 Acquisition MPU Board Status LEDs

6Ć100

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Troubleshooting

This section provides additional information and procedures for troubleĆ

shooting a faulty CSA 803C to the FRU level.

This procedure requires an Extended Diagnostics power supplies troubleĆ

shooting fixture. Refer to Table 4Ć2 for a complete description of the equipĆ

ment required.

Power Supply

Module

Module Troubleshooting

If any Power Supply module problems are present, they appear when the

ON/STANDBY switch is set to ON. If the green light beside the ON label fails

to light, then check for the following conditions:

The PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH located on the back panel is in the ON

position.

The line cord is connected to a functional power source with the same

output voltage set as the LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the back panel.

The fuse is good. If the fuse is blown, then replace the fuse.

The fan is exhausting air from the instrument when the ON/STANDBY

switch is ON. A defective fan causes an overĆtemperature shutdown in

the power supply.

If these checks fail to correct the problem, connect the Extended DiagnosĆ

tics 11000ĆSeries Power Supplies Test Fixture to the Power Supply module

(refer to the documentation accompanying the test fixture for troubleshootĆ

ing techniques). The test fixture indicates which power supply voltage

source is at fault. To help isolate the source of the problem, set the instruĆ

ments ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY, and disconnect the suspected

faulty power supply voltage source from the Power Supply module. Set the

ON/STANDBY switch to ON. If the test fixture does not record a fault, then

you have verified the suspected faulty power source. This procedure is only

effective for externally shorted power supplies. Once again, refer to the

documentation accompanying the test fixture for more troubleshooting

information.

This board is implicitly verified; that is, if all the other FRUs pass diagnostic

testing, then you can assume that the A4 Regulator board is operating correctly

as well.

A4 Regulator Board

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Troubleshooting

This procedure requires a test terminal and a compatible RSĆ232ĆC serial

interface cable. Refer to Table 4Ć2 for a complete description of the equipĆ

ment required.

CRT, A7 CRT Socket

Board, or A8 CRT

Driver Board

Module Troubleshooting

If the CSA 803C powersĆon (the ON/STANDBY light is on), but the display

gives scrambled information or none at all, then the CRT and A8 CRT Driver

board are suspect. The following two procedures help you determine whethĆ

er the A15 MMUboard or one of the CRT units, (either the CRT, the A7 CRT

Socket board or the A8 CRT Driver board) is at fault.

With the power off (ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY), remove the top

cover, then turn the power on. Observe the two LEDs on the A15 MMU

board and those on the A17 Executive Processor board in the card

cage. These LEDs should flicker on and off until the diagnostic tests are

complete and then all turn off. If any of these LEDs remain lit, it indicates

a problem with the board on which the LED resides. If all LEDs turn off,

then the CRT, A7 CRT Socket board, or the A8 CRT Driver board is

suspect.

With the power off, connect a test terminal (ANSI 3.64Ćcompatible) to the

CSA 803C using an RSĆ232ĆC cable. Touch the screen through the full

powerĆon cycle to force a diagnostic error so the instrument enters

Extended Diagnostics. On the test terminal, type T to display the EXĆ

TENDED DIAGNOSTICS menu on the terminal display. If the displayed

errors are only for the front panel touch screen, then the CRT, the A7

CRT Socket board, or the A8 CRT Driver board is at fault. Note any other

errors and use Table 6Ć5, earlier in this section, to identify the suspect

subsystem.

This board is implicitly verified; that is, if all the other FRUs pass diagnostic

testing, then you can assume that the A13 Mother board is operating corĆ

rectly as well.

A13 Mother Board

6Ć102

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Troubleshooting

The A14 I/O board has four fuses (see Figure 6Ć37). F200 supplies +5 V to

the A12 Rear Panel board. F800 supplies +5 V to the A10 Front Panel ConĆ

trol board and the A9 Touch Panel board. F600 supplies +15 V to the

A14 I/O board, card cage, A10 Front Panel Control board, A9 Touch Panel

board, A11 Front Panel Button board, and A12 Rear Panel board (reduced

to +12 V). F602 supplies -15 V to the A14 I/O board, card cage, A10 Front

Panel Control board (reduced to -5 V), and A12 Rear Panel board (reduced

to -12 V).

Fuse Testing

F200 supplies +5 V to the A12 Rear Panel board. If diagnostics report

failure of all three ports (RSĆ232ĆC, GPIB, and PRINTER), then this fuse

is the probable suspect (assuming that the ribbon cable to the A12 Rear

Panel board is connected). When tested with a multimeter, this fuse

should measure less than 1.5 V.

F800 supplies +5 V to the A10 Front Panel Control board and the

A11 Front Panel board. If the diagnostics report both an A9 Touch Panel

board failure and knob failures, then this fuse is one possible source of

this problem. When tested with a multimeter, this fuse should measure

less than 1 W.

F600 supplies +15 V to the A14 I/O board temperature sensor and tone

generator, the lights of the A11 Front Panel Button board, the A9 Touch

Panel board, the A12 Rear Panel board's RSĆ232ĆC output line drivers,

the card cage, and the A17 Executive Processor board's NVRAM. If the

NVRAM battery test and the RSĆ232ĆC External Loop Back test fail (but

the Internal Loop Back test passes), and the A11 Front Panel Button

board's lights, temperature sensor, and tone generator are all off, then

this fuse is the probable suspect. When tested with an multimeter, this

fuse should measure less than 1 W.

F602 supplies -15 V to the A14 I/O board temperature sensor and tone

generator, A12 Rear Panel board's RSĆ232ĆC output line drivers, the

A9 Touch Panel board, and the card cage. If the temperature sensor,

tone generator, and RSĆ232ĆC External Loop Back test fail (but the

Internal Loop Back test passes), then this fuse is the probable suspect.

When tested with an multimeter, this fuse should measure less than 1 W.

The A14 I/O board uses the +15 V and -15 V supplies on board to operate

the temperature sensor and the tone generator. Of the other card cage

boards, the A18 Memory board uses the +15 V supply to operate the

NVRAM circuitry. The information above and Table 6Ć17 will help you to

identify a failure of one of these fuses. If a test fails, then check the fuses.

WARNING

Using a replacement fuse with an incorrect current rating may

cause the ribbon cables to melt and create fire danger during a

component fault.

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Troubleshooting

See Figures 6Ć2 and 6Ć37 for the location of the line fuse and the A14 I/O

board fuses, respectively.

When a fuse must be replaced, unsolder the fuse from the board. Be careful

not to damage the solder pads on the board. (It may be helpful to straighten

the fuse leads on the rear of the board before removing the leads from their

holes in the circuit board.) Refer to the PartsList section for the correct value

and part number of each fuse.

TableĂ6Ć17:ăA14 I/O Board Fuse Failures

Fuse Executive Kernel Test Failure

(refer to Table 6Ć10, Executive

Subsystem Error Index Codes)

SelfĆTest/Extended Test Failure

F200 10hex (GPIB Interrupt)

open

F800

open

13hex (Front Panel Inter)

NOTE: The front panel lightsdo

not work so the code must be

read from the error status test

points(TP200ĆTP205) on the A17

Executive Processor board.

F600 Passes the Kernel diagnostic

open tests, but the front panel lights

are not lit.

Exec Control

ąNVRAM

ąąBattery

ąă*Data Lines

ąă*Addr/Data

Internal I/O

ąTemp Sensor

ąąComparator

E3111ă1

E1411ă3

E1411ă1

E1421ă1

E1431ă1

E3111ă1

ă*Tone Gen

ăą*Ramp Tone (works)

ĊĊ

NOTE: The front panel lights,

soft keys, and hard keys do not

work.

F602 13hex (Front Panel Inter)

open

NOTE: The tone generator hasa

very different tone.

*indicates a Manual Test forced by the operator. The test is not automatically executed by

SelfĆTest diagnostics.

6Ć104

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Troubleshooting

Fuse (F200)

Fuse (F600)

Fuse (F602)

Fuse (F800)

Figure 6Ć37:ăA14 I/O Board Fuse Locator Diagram

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Troubleshooting

Table 6Ć18 lists the time base calibration errors that can appear on the

CSA 803A screen and the suspected faulty FRUs that cause the error. The

FRUs are listed in the order of most to least likely source of the error.

Time Base

Calibration Errors

Time base calibration errors whose error codes are greater than 100 have

two different forms, depending on when the error occurs. If the error occurs

during powerĆon then the message will say:

Time base calibration failed at power up: 2XX

where 2XX is the error code.

If the error occurs at any other time, then the message will say:

Time base calibration failed: 1XX

where 1XX is the error code.

Calibration data to enhance the time interpolator linearity is stored in NVRAM

on the Time Base/Controller board. If this NVRAM fails, a T1331 error occurs

during powerĆon diagnostics. The values are written at the factory with the

GPIB command CALCORRECTION.

CALCORRECTION<ui>: N

where <ui>= 0. . .32 and N= -128. . .+127

CAUTION

The calibration enhancement values are set at time of manufacture.

There is no query form of this command. Do NOT reset these

values. If a T1331 failure occurs during extended powerĆon diagĆ

nostics or you suspect a time interpolator error, contact Tektronix

factory service.

A T1331 failure causes all N values in the 33 ui locations to be reset to zero.

The oscilloscope will still run, but with decreased accuracy in the time interĆ

polator linearity. Resetting NVRAM with the Teksecure feature does not affect

the Time Base/Controller board NVRAM.

6Ć106

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OtherTroubleshooting

TableĂ6Ć18:ăTime Base Calibration Errors

Error Message

Error Code

Suspect FRU

Minor time base calibration problem:

TBC

Time base calibration failed (at powerĆon): 101 (201)

TBC

102 (202)

103 (203)

111 (211)

113 (213)

115 (215)

117 (217)

121 (221)

122 (222)

123 (223)

125 (225)

126 (226)

131 (231)

TBC

STROBEBUF

STROBEDR

TBC

132 (232)

134 (234)

135 (235)

TBC

STROBEBUF

STROBEDR

TBC

136 (236)

137 (237)

138 (238)

TBC

STROBEBUF

STROBEDR, or

Sampling Head

CSA 803C Service Manual

6Ć107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Troubleshooting

When acquisition calibration errors occur, a message will appear on the

CSA 803A screen followed by a number that indicates in which Acquisition

system the error was detected. Following this number, there will be a string

of eight, fourĆdigit error codes that are used to identify possible faulty FRUs.

The following example shows the form that the error message will appear:

Acquisition

Calibration Errors

Error detected in acquisition system AA: BBBB, CCCC, DDDD,

EEEE, FFFF, GGGG, HHHH, IIII

where the A digits represent the number of the Acquisition system, and the

B, C, D, E, F, G, H, and I digits represent the fourĆdigit error codes.

The B and I digits can be ignored. If any of the C or D digits are nonĆzero,

then the possible faulty FRUs, from most to least likely, are:

ACQMPU

MFACQCON

ACQANALOG

TBC

If any of the E, F, G, or H digits are nonĆzero, then the possible fault FRUs,

from most to least likely, are:

ACQANALOG

ACQMPU

MFACQCON

6Ć108

Maintenance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Options

This section contains information on instrument and power cord options

availablefor your CSA 803C.

Your instrument may be equipped with one or more options. A brief descripĆ

tion of each available option is given in the following discussion. Option

information is incorporated into theappropriatesections of themanual set.

Refer to the Table of Contents for the location of option information. For

further information and prices of instrument options, see your Tektronix

Products Catalog or contact your local Tektronix service center.

Instrument

Options

Option 1R Ċ adds sliderails and rackmounting hardwareto convert the

benchtop instrument to a standard 19Ćinch rackmount version. This option

can be added at any time.

Option 10 Ċ deletes the Prescaler. The Prescaler circuitry extends the

trigger bandwidth to 10 GHz. The Prescaler may be added at any time with

an option kit.

Option A1 Ċ replaces the standard power cord with the Universal EuroĆ

pean 220 V type power cord.

Option A2 Ċ replaces the standard power cord with the United Kingdom

240 V typepower cord.

Option A3 Ċ replaces the standard power cord with the Australian 240 V

typepower cord.

Option A4 Ċ replaces the standard power cord with the North American

250 V typepower cord.

Option A5 Ċ replaces the standard power cord with the Switzerland 240 V

typepower cord.

CSA 803C Service Manual

7Ć1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Options

A power cord with appropriate plug configuration is supplied with each

instrument. Table 7Ć1, PowerĆCord Conductor Identification, gives the colorĆ

coding of the conductors in the power cord. If you require a power cord

other than the one supplied, refer to Figure 7Ć1, PowerĆCord Plug IdentificaĆ

tion.

Power Cord

Information

TableĂ7Ć1:ăPowerĆCord Conductor Identification

Conductor

Color

Alternate Color

Black

Ungrounded (Line)

Grounded (Neutral)

Grounded (Earth)

Brown

Light Blue

Green/Yellow

White

Green

Standard*

North American

115V

Option A1

UniversalEuro

230V

Option A2

Option A3

Australian

230V

Option A4*

North American

230V

Option A5

Switzerland

230V

Option 1A*

Option 1B

North American

3ĆPhase

North American

115V/High Power

* Canadian Standards Association certification

includes these power plugs for use in the

North American power network

Figure 7Ć1:ăPowerĆCord Plug Identification

7Ć2

Options

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Electrical Parts

The modules that make up this instrument are often a combination of meĆ

chanical and electrical subparts. Therefore, all replaceable modules are

listed in the Parts List section. Refer to that section for part numbers when

using this manual.

CSA 803C Service Manual

8Ć1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Electrical Parts

8Ć2

Electrical Parts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GVYPU DTNS NW

4q l

n3a

edg1, ; a

k t me

m.s

;

uv C3C f

edg1, ; a

n; 1

n; 8

wgu

)

(

;

n; 1

edg1, b

wgu g

(

;

nCCd

nCCe

nCCf

gdf

n; a

n34

nCCg

mr wf po

gdf

KTS R D . : HMA C, BH M RW K XP TYXNV GVYPU DTNS NW

KTS R D A: A. L 'K M YOR D T R GYN Q GVYPU DTNS NW

HMA C, BH MR TPR L NX NV

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reference

Oscillator

SelfĆTests

Diagnostics

Feedback

Strobe Sense

From

Strobe Distribution

Trigger

Recognizer Trigger

Strobe Drive to

Strobe Distribution

Time Base

Prescaler

Trigger Input

8 Prescaler

TDR Drive to

Strobe Distribution

Direct

Trigger Input

To.From

Acquisition

System

Interface

To.From

MMU

Acquisition Systems

Through Strobe

Distribution

MMU

Interface

Power Control

J61

J65

Over.Under Voltage

RAM.ROM

Local

Regulator

Power

Voltage

Fault

Detect

SemiĆregulated Power

Microprocessor

+; 1V REF

Reference and Operation Amplifier Power

Figure 9Ć4:ăA5 Time Base'Controller Board Block Diagram

+51V

Regulator

+; 5V

Regulator

+5V

Regulator

CONVERGENCE

Convergence

Red

, 51V

Regulator

, ; 5V

Regulator

, 5V

Regulator

Red

Amplifier

RED Adjustment

To CRT

From A; 5

MMU

Green

Amplifier

J66

J64

GREEN Adjustment

+5V Digital

Blue

Regulated

Power

Regulated Power

Sense J95 ( J96

Blue

Amplifier

BLUE Adjustment

Figure 9Ć3:ăA4 Regulator Board Block Diagram

Figure 9Ć5:ăA7 CRT Socket Board Block Diagram

CSA 8, 3C Service Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HĆLIN Adjustment

HĆPOS Adjustment

HĆSIZE Adjustment

Horizontal

Sweep

Circuit

Coils

GPIB Req

-GPIB Gr

RPD0-D7

RPA1-A4

-GPIB Sel

DO0-DO7

GPIB

Control

Buffer

GPIB

Controller

Grid

Bias

J50

J78

Control

GPIB

Control

Buffer

Control Signal

GPIB Clk

-RP Reset

LED A

Red

Green

Blue

Red

GPIB Interface

From A15

MMU

Reset

Inverter

Green

Raster Scan CRT

A7 CRT

Socket Board

(See

Blue

RSĆ232ĆC

Transceiver

Buffer

RPD0-D7

16kV

Standard

RSĆ232ĆC

Controller

RPA1-A4

RED Adjustment

SCREEN, FOCUS

Heater

Figure 9Ć5)

J51

-Standard RS

GREEN Adjustment

RSĆ232ĆC

Transceiver

Buffer

BLUE Adjustment

Standard RSĆ232ĆC Interface

Reset

Beam

Current

Limit

Clock

Generator

Coils

High and

Grid Voltage

Generator

SCREEN

FOCUS

Low

Vertical

Sweep

Circuit

Data

Buffer

Port A

Synchronization

RPD0-D7

RPA1-A4

Printer

Controller

Port B

N/T

J111

-Printer Select

Data

Buffer

Degauss

VERT SIZE Adjustment

VERT POS Adjustment

Data

Buffer

Port C

Printer Interface

Figure 9Ć6:ăA8 CRT Driver Board Block Diagram

Figure 9Ć7:ăA12 Rear Panel Assembly Block Diagram

CSA 803C Service Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

J72

r t r

D t

I/O D t Bus

D t

L t

r ss

J78

I/O

P105

Ex ut v

D t Bus

L t

r ss

D t

Syst

R s t

+5V

ur t

D t

R s t

r t r

R s t

D t

L t

R s t

PWR U

r ss

J72

Ext

D t Bus

D t

Ex ut v

Pr ss r

SRDY

DMA

Sw t

Ex ut v

Syst

D t

ss r

SDI

r t r

Bus

r ss

r ss Bus

Ex ut v

Syst

r ss

INTR

INT0-INT12

Bus

Figure 9Ć8:ăA. 4 I'O Board Block Diagram

tr Bus

Ex ut v

Syst

I t rru t

tr rs

IR Fr

A14 I/O

T /Fr

B s /C tr

Bus

r ss

L t

r ss

T C Ć

I t rru t C tr

ss r

DMA R/G T A14 I/O

B s /

I t r

L t

C Ć

ss r

I t rru t C tr

D t Bu r E

Sw t

M r

ss r

T /Fr

A17

Ex ut v

SRDY

D s

I t r

EXP

I t r

SYNC

MMU IC

D s y IC

WAIT REQ

1 WAIT

SRDY

Pu Ću

I v rt r

SRDY

ss r

W t

St t

r t r

W t

J77

St t

VIDEO

DAC

2 WAIT

4 WAIT

W v

D s

RAM

W v

RAM

B t M

RAM

7 W t

SRDY

Figure 9Ć9:ăA. 5 MMU Board Block Diagram

Figure 9Ć. , :ăA. 7 Executive Processor Board Block Diagram

CSA 8, 3C Service Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Strobe Sense

Select

Time Base/

Controller

Board

Strobe Sense

Sampling Head Strobe Sense

n1A, n2A, n3A, n4A

n32

Strobe Sense

n29A, n30A

Strobe

Deskew

Sampling

Head

Compartments

Sampling Strobe Signals

n18, n28, n38, n48

Strobe Deskew Voltages

n34

MF Strobe

Drive Board

TDR Buffer

and Level

Shift

Differential TDR Signal

n33A, n33B

EPROM

DCS 0-3

TDR Drive Signals

n1C, n2C, n3C, n4C

Figure 9Ć. A:ăA. 9 Strobe'TDR Buffer Board Block Diagram

System

RAM

DCS 8

Address

Data

n11

n12

n13

n14

NonĆVolatile Ram

DCS 4-b

"5 VRef

Power

Precision

Voltage

Reference

Address

Latches

Battery

Backup

Memory

Data

Buffers

Address Decode

and

Memory Select

Memory

Configuration

Readback

Wait State

Generator

Wait State

Diagnostics

n10

Control

P106 Mother Board Connector

Figure 9Ć. . :ăA. 8 Memory Board Block Diagram

Figure 9Ć. B:ăAA6 M'F Acquisition Interconnect Board Block Diagram

CSA 8, BC Service Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

; 4 eit -C.; V to +C.; V

; C eit 1V to +3V

Signal

Offset gdf

Variable

k ain gdf

XC.XC1

Sampling

l ead

mnputs

mnput euffer

-; V to +; V

O V f enter Scale

Vin

d.g

f onverter

Vrt

Vrb

mnput

Multiplexer

+; V Rhi

XC.XC1

k ain

Multiplier

x1.a to xa

+CV f dL

-CVf dL

+; 6mV f dL

Vrm

-; V Rhi

Offset

f orrection

gdf

8-eit

-a11mV to +a11mV

Transition

Logic

; 6-eit gOT

Number

f omparator

Level gdf

f omparator

; 4-eit

-C.; V to +C.; V

Figure 9Ć14:ăA27 Acquisition Analog Board Block Diagram

Shared

Triple

Port

To d.g

f onverter

To.i rom

Time ease

f ontroller

Time ease.

f ontroller

mnterface

RdM

i rom f omparator

f hannel d

i ilter and

Transition

f ounter

Sampling

l ead

f ontrol

ROM

i ilter and

Transition

f ounter

i rom f omparator

f hannel e

Microprocessor

To d.g

f onverter

Figure 9Ć15:ăA28 Acquisition MPU Board Block Diagram

CSA 803C Service Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CSA 803C Service Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CSA 803C Service Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CSA803C Detailed Block (Cabling) Diagram

CSA 803C Service Manual

9Ć9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CSA 803C Service Manual

9Ć10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CSA 803C Service Manual

i i

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CSA 803C Service Manual

9Ći 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

This section contains a list ofthe replaceable components for the

CSA 803C. As described below, use this list to identify and order replaceĆ

ment parts.

Replacement parts are available from or through your local Tektronix, Inc.

service center or representative.

PartsOrdering

Information

Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to accommodate

improved components as they become available and to give you the benefit

ofthe latest circuit improvements. Therefore, when ordering parts, it is

important to include the following information in your order:

part number

instrument type or model number

instrument serial number

instrument modification number, if applicable

If a part you order has been replaced with a different or improved part, your

local Tektronix service center or representative will contact you concerning

any change in the part number.

Change information, if any, is located at the back of this manual.

Module Replacement

The CSA 803C is serviced by module replacement, so there are three opĆ

tions you should consider:

Module Exchange. In some cases you may exchange your module for

a remanufactured module. These modules cost significantly less than

new modules and meet the same factory specifications. For more inĆ

formation about the module exchange program, call 1-800-TEKWIDE,

ext. BV 5799.

Module Repair. You may ship your module to us for repair, after which

we will return it to you.

New Modules. You may purchase new replacement modules in the

same way as other replacement parts.

Firmware Replacement

To replace firmware in this product, order the firmware by the part number

printed on the component label. Firmware is not listed in the replaceable

parts lists.

CSA 803C Service Manual

10Ć1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

The tabular information in the Replaceable Parts List is arranged for quick

retrieval. Understanding the structure and features of the list will help you

find the all the information you need for ordering replacement parts.

Using the

Replaceable Parts

List

Item Names

In the Replaceable Parts List, an Item Name is separated from the descripĆ

tion by a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an Item Name may someĆ

times appear as incomplete. For further Item Name identification, U.S.

Federal Cataloging Handbook H6Ć1 can be used where possible.

Indentation System

This parts list is indented to show the relationship between items. The

following example is of the indentation system used in the Description

column:

1ą 2ą 3ą 4ą 5

Name & Description

Assembly and/or Component

Attaching parts for Assembly and/or Component

(END ATTACHING PARTS)

DetailPart of Assembyl and/or Component

Attaching parts for DetailPart

(END ATTACHING PARTS)

Parts of DetailPart

Attaching parts for Parts of DetailPart

(END ATTACHING PARTS)

Attaching parts always appear at the same indentation as the item they

mount, while the detail parts are indented to the right. Indented items are

part of, and included with, the next higher indentation. Attaching parts must

be purchased separately, unless otherwise specified.

Abbreviations

Abbreviations conform to American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

standard Y1.1

10Ć2

Mechanical Parts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

TableĂ10Ć1:ăBoard FRUs

FRU

PartNumber

Description

670-9365-06

620-0022-09

670-9640-00

670-9655-01

672-0383-00

672-0384-00

M/F Strobe Drive

Power Supply Assembly

M/F Power Connect

Regulator

Time Base/Controller w/Prescaler (Std)

Time Base/Controller w/o Prescaler

(Opt. 10)

671-4471-00

672-1372-01

--------

Calibrator

CRTDriver

Touch Panel Assembly

(Not Replaceable-Order

614-0941-00)

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

A17

A18

A19

No A#

A20

A21

A22

A23

A26

A27

A28

670-8847-01

671-1130-00

671-0013-00

671-1129-00

670-8854-04

671-1023-02

671-2888-00

671-1890-00

671-2909-00

657-0089-00

670-9366-02

670-9361-00

670-9364-05

670-9363-01

Front Panel Control

Front Panel Button

Rear Panel

Mother

Input/Output

Memory Management Unit

Executive Processor

Memory

Strobe TDR Buffer (P/O 657-)

Acquisition Module

Head Interconnect (P/O 657-)

M/F Acquisition Interconnect (P/O 657-)

Acquisition Analog (P/O 657-)

Acquisition MPU (P/O 657-)

CSA 803C Service Manual

10Ć3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

CROSS INDEX - MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER

Mfr.

Code

Manufacturer

Address

City, State, Zip Code

S0482

S3109

SONY CONSUMER ELECTRONICS

FELLER

TOKYO JAPAN

72 VERONICA AVE

UNIT 4

SUMMERSET NJ 08873

S3629

SCHURTER AG H

C/O PANEL COMPONENTS CORP

2015 SECOND STREET

BERKELEY CA 94170

TK0435 LEWIS SCREW CO

4300 S RACINE AVE

635 NW 16TH

CHICAGO IL 60609-3320

PORTLAND OR 97209-2206

HILLSBORO OR 97123

PORTLAND OR 97209-2214

SPRINGFIELD OR 97477

TIGARD OR 97223

TK0488 CURRAN COIL SPRING INC

TK0588 UNIVERSAL PRECISION PRODUCTS

TK0623 GENERAL TOOL AND SUPPLY CO (DIST)

TK1159 IMPROVED PRODUCTS

TK1163 POLYCAST INC

1775 NW 216TH

407 NW 17TH

3400 OLYMPIC STREET

9898 SW TIGARD ST

TK1262 MURPHY ELECTRONICS INC (DIST)

TK1302 MOUNTAIN MOLDING

606 SECOND STREET

BERTHOUD CO 80513

OSAKA JAPAN

TK1416 SHARP CORP

22-22 NAGAIKE-CHO

ABENO-KU

TK1465 BEAVERTONPARTS MFG CO

TK1499 AMLAN INC

1800 NW 216TH AVE

97 THORNWOOD RD

HILLSBORO OR 97124-6629

STAMFORD CT 06903-2617

TUALATINOR 97062

TK1547 MOORE ELECTRONICS INC (DIST)

19500 SW 90TH COURT

PO BOX 1030

TK1572 RAN-ROB INC

631 85TH AVE

OAKLAND CA 94621-1254

ALOHA OR 97007

TK1617 CRAFT FACTORY PLASTICS

TK1719 NEDELCO BV (THOMAS & BETTS)

17145 SW ALEXANDER

POSTBUS 6431

3002 AK ROTTERDAM THE

NETHERLANDS

TK1727 PHILIPS NEDERLAND BV

AFD ELONCO

POSTBUS 90050

5600 PB EINDHOVEN THE

NETHERLANDS

TK1869 ALPS

100 N CNTRE AVE

0 S W BON ITA

ROCKVILLE CENTRE NY 11570

TIGARD OR 97223

TK1905 PUGET CORP OF OREGON744

TK1916 SKS DIE CASTING CO

TK1943 NEILSEN MANUFACTURING INC

TK1967 SYNDETEK

2200 4TH

BERKELEY CA 94710-2215

SALEM OR 97303

3501 PORTLAND ROAD NE

3915 E MAIN

SPOKANE WA 99202

TK2072 PRECISIONDECORATORS INC

HAWTHORNE BUSINESS CENTER

5289 NE ELAM YOUNG PARKWAY

SUITE G400

HILLSBORO OR 97124

TK2105 QUALTEK ELECTRONICS CORP

FAN-S DIV

7158 INDUSTRIAL PARK BLVD

MENTOR OH 44060

TK2122 INDUSTRIAL GASKET INC

TK2338 ACC MATERIALS

1623 SE 6TH AVE

PORTLAND OR 97214-3502

BEAVERTONOR 97077

ED SNYDER

BLDG 38-302

TK2435 MEC IMEX INCORPORATED

TK2469 UNITREK CORPORATION

6TH FLOOR 162 CHANG AN E ROAD

SEC 2

TAIPEI, TAIWANROC

3000 LEWIS & CLARK WAY

SUITE #2

VANCOUVER WA 98601

0B445

0JR05

0J260

ELECTRI-CORD MFG CO INC

TRIQUEST CORP

312 EAST MAIN ST

WESTFIELD PA 16950

3000 LEWIS AND CLARK HWY

PO BOX 4200

VANCOUVER WA 98661-2999

BEAVERTONOR 97076-4200

COMTEK MANUFACTURING OF OREGON

(METALS)

10Ć4

Mechanical Parts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

CROSS INDEX - MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER

Mfr.

Code

Manufacturer

Address

City, State, Zip Code

0J9P9

0KB01

0KB05

00779

GEROME MFG CO INC

STAUFFER SUPPLY

NORTH STAR NAMEPLATE

AMP INC

PO BOX 737

NEWBERG OR 97132

PORTLAND OR 97214

HILLSBORO OR 97124

HARRISBURG PA 17105

810 SE SHERMAN

1281-S NE 25TH

2800 FULLING MILL

PO BOX 3608

06915

11897

18677

RICHCO PLASTIC CO

5825 N TRIPP AVE

CHICAGO IL 60646-6013

HAWTHORNE CA 90250-3318

EL MONTE CA 91731

PLASTIGLIDE MFG CORP

2701 W EL SEGUNDO BLVD

3445 FLETCHER AVE

SCANBE MFG CO

DIV OF ZERO CORP

2W944

23730

24931

PAPST MECHATRONIC CORP

MARK EYELETAND STAMPING INC

SPECIALTY CONNECTOR CO INC

AQUIDNECK INDUSTRIAL PK

63 WAKELEE RD

NEWPORT RI 02840

WOLCOTTCT06716-2609

FRANKLIN IN 46131

2100 EARLYWOOD DR

PO BOX 547

28520

HEYCO MOLDED PRODUCTS

750 BOULEVARD

P O BOX 160

KENILWORTH NJ 07033-1721

29870

30010

5Y400

VICTOR CORP

618 MAIN STREET

40 LINDEMAN DR

1800 216TH AVE NW

WEST WARWICK RI 02893

TRUMBULL CT 06611-4739

HILLSBORO OR 97124-6629

BICC-VERO ELECTRONICS INC

TRIAX METAL PRODUCTS INC

DIV OF BEAVERTON PARTS MFG CO

50579

SIEMENS COMPONENTS INC

OPTOELECTRONICS DIV

19000 HOMESTEAD RD

CUPERTINO CA 95014-0712

52814

53387

61058

TECH-ETCH INC

45 ALDRIN RD

PO BOX 2963

PLYMOUTH MA 02360

MINNESOTA MINING MFG CO

AUSTIN TX 78769-2963

SECAUCUS NJ 07094-2917

MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORP OF

AMERICA

PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL CO DIV

ONE PANASONIC WAY

PO BOX 1502

61857

SAN-0 INDUSTRIAL CORP

85 ORVILLE DR

PO BOX 511

BOHEMIA LONG ISLAND NY

11716-2501

66302

71400

VLSI TECHNOLOGY INC

1109 MCKAY DR

SAN JOSE CA 95131-1706

STLOUIS MO 63178

BUSSMANN

DIV OF COOPER INDUSTRIES INC

114 OLD STATE RD

PO BOX 14460

75915

78189

80009

83385

LITTELFUSE INC

SUB TRACOR INC

800 E NORTHWEST HWY

DES PLAINES IL 60016-3049

ELGIN IL 60120

ILLINOIS TOOL WORKS INC

SHAKEPROOF DIV

STCHARLES ROAD

TEKTRONIX INC

14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR

PO BOX 500

BEAVERTON OR 97077-0001

TROY MI 48098

MICRODOTMFG INC

GREER-CENTRAL DIV

3221 W BIG BEAVER RD

83486

83553

ELCO INDUSTRIES INC

1101 SAMUELSON RD

ROCKFORD IL 61101

ASSOCIATED SPRING BARNES GROUP

INC

15001 S BROADWAY

P O BOX 231

GARDENA CA 90248-1819

85480

93907

BRADY W H CO

CORP H Q

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS DIV

2221 W CAMDEN RD

PO BOX 2131

MILWAUKEE WI 53209

TEXTRON INC

CAMCAR DIV

600 18TH AVE

ROCKFORD IL 61108-5181

CSA 803C Service Manual

10Ć5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

Fig. &

Index

No.

Tektronix

Part No.

Serial No.

Mfr.

Effective Dscont Qty 12345 Name & Description

Code

Mfr. Part No.

CABINET

10-1-1 200-2191-00

CAP,RETAINER:PLASTIC

0JR05

ORDER BY DESC

-2

367-0248-01

211-0718-00

212-0681-00

426-2098-01

211-0721-00

101-0143-00

426-2099-01

348-0886-00

348-0879-00

348-0596-00

348-0875-00

211-0711-00

214-0603-02

386-0227-00

386-1151-00

200-3415-00

200-3759-00

HANDLE,CARRYING:16.341 L,W/CLIP

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.312,FLH,STL

SCREW,MACHINE:10-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL

FRAME SECT,CAB.:LEFT SIDE

TK1465 ORDER BY DESC

-3

0KB01

83486

ORDER BY DESC

MACHINE SCREW

-4

-5

TK1465 ORDER BY DESC

-6

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.375,PNH,STL

TRIM,DECORATIVE:SET LEFT & RIGHT

FRAME SECT,CAB.:RIGHT SIDE

0KB01

80009

ORDER BY DESC

101014300

-7

-8

TK1465 ORDER BY DESC

TK1159 ORDER BY DESC

TK1163 ORDER BY DESC

TK2122 348-0596-00

TK0488 ORDER BY DESC

-9

SHLD GSKT,ELEK:FINGER TYPE,18.310 L

FOOT,CABINET:BOTTOM,BLUE,POLYCARB

PAD,CAB.FOOT:0.69 X 0.255 X 0.06,PU

FLIPSTAND,CAB.:

-10

-11

-12

-13

-14

-15

-16

-17

-18

SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL,T15

PIN ASSY,SECRG:W/SPRING WASHER

STOP,CLP,RIM CL:ACETAL

0KB01

0J260

0JR05

83553

80009

0J260

ORDER BY DESC

386-0227-00

ORDER BY DESC

200341500

CLAMP,RIM CLENC:SPG STL

COV,CAB LIFTOFF:LOWER,AL,BLUE PAINT

COVER,CABINET:TOP,LIFT OFF

ORDER BY DESC

10Ć6

Mechanical Parts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

Figure 10Ć1:ăCabinet

CSA 803C Service Manual

10Ć7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

Fig. &

Index

No.

Tektronix

Part No.

Serial No.

Mfr.

Effective Dscont Qty 12345 Name & Description

Code

Mfr. Part No.

FRONT PANEL

10-2-1 614-0941-00

SUBPANELASSY:CSA803C

(SEE A9,EXCHANGE ITEM)

80009

0JR05

614094100

-2

-3

386-5806-00

--------

FRAME,LENS:TOUCH PANEL

ORDER BY DESC

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:TOUCH PANEL

(NOT REPL, ORDER 614-0917-XX)

-4

366-0600-01

211-0372-00

211-0722-00

386-5268-07

211-0721-00

381-0469-00

211-0711-00

131-1688-00

154-0946-00

PUSH BUTTON:0.269 X 0.409 ABS

TK1163 ORDER BY DESC

B80-00020-003

-5

SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.312,PNH,STL93907

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL0KB01

SUBPANEL,FRONT:FINISHED

-6

ORDER BY DESC

-7

TK1916 386-5268-07

ORDER BY DESC

-8

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.375,PNH,STL0KB01

BAR,SUPPORT:CRT

-9

5Y400

0KB01

00779

S0482

ORDER BY DESC

42822-4

-10

-11

-12

SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL,T15

TERM,QIK DISC.:0.250 SPADE,STUD MT;MALE

ELECTRON TUBE:CRT,COLOR

(V130)

09FXES-C1

-13

-14

-15

-16

210-0006-00

211-0718-00

311-2320-00

671-1130-00

WASHER,LOCK:#6 INTL,0.018 THK,STL

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.312,FLH,STL

ENCODER,DIGITAL:INCREMENTAL,50PPR

78189

0KB01

1206-00-00-0541

ORDER BY DESC

TK1869 EC24B50000FB

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANELBUTTON

(SEE A11, EXCHANGE ITEM)

80009

671113000

-17

-18

-19

348-1075-00

211-0410-00

SHLD GSKT,ELEK:SOLID TYPE,1.66 L

52814

93907

ORDER BY DESC

829-07510-024

SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.437,PNH,STL,T10

260-2275-00

343-0549-00

SWITCH,ROCKER:SPST,30MA,12V

STRAP,TIEDOWN,E:0.098 W X 4.0 L,ZYTEL

TK1262 MEO1O-D

TK1499 HW-047

-20

-21

-22

-23

-24

-25

333-3418-00

150-0121-12

210-0586-00

348-1076-00

210-0465-00

PANEL,FRONT:11801,UPPER

TK2072 ORDER BY DESC

LAMP,CARTRIDGE:5V,0.064,GREEN LENS 4.5L

NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL

SHLD GSKT,ELEK:SOLID TYPE,2.28 L

NUT,PLAIN,HEX:0.25-32 X 0.375,BRS

80009

150012112

TK0435 ORDER BY DESC

52814

0KB01

ORDER BY DESC

210-0223-01

315-0105-00

TERMINAL,LUG:0.26 ID,LOCKING,BRS TINNED

RES,FXD,FILM:1M OHM,5%,0.25W

(R89)

-26

-27

348-0878-00

SHLD GSKT,ELEK:SOLID TYPE,7.646 L

52814

ORDER BY DESC

103-0269-00

131-6337-00

ADAPTER,CONN:SMA TO PELTOLA

ADAPTER,CONN;PRESCALER

24931

39JR198-1

39AS1100

-28

-29

-30

-31

-32

-33

-34

-35

-36

333-3920-01

210-0895-00

136-0140-00

220-0052-00

384-1682-02

366-0600-00

131-4763-00

211-0711-00

211-0378-00

PANEL,FRONT:CSA803C,LOWER

0KB05

333-3920-01

WASHER,SHLDR:0.255 X 0.375 X 0.105 THK,NYL

JACK,TIP:BANANA,CHARCOALGRAY

NUT,PLAIN,HEX:M9 X 0.75

TK1617 NA

TK1617 136-0140-00

0KB01

80009

ORDER BY DESC

384168202

SHAFT,EXTENSION:1.833 L,ALUMINUM

PUSH BUTTON:0.269 X 0.409,ABS

TK1163 ORDER BY DESC

TK2469 ORDER BY DESC

CONTACT,ELEC:GROUND,CU BE

SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL,T15

SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.375.PNH,STL,T9

0KB01

ORDER BY DESC

10Ć8

Mechanical Parts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

Fig. &

Index

No.

Tektronix

Part No.

Serial No.

Mfr.

Effective Dscont Qty 12345 Name& Description

Code

Mfr. Part No.

10-2-37 211-0373-00

SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25,PNH,STL

83486

ORDER BY DESC

-38

-39

-40

-41

200-3143-01

213-0022-00

366-0582-01

334-9521-00

COVER,CRTSCALE:BEZEL

SETSCREW:4-40 X 0.188,STL

KNOB:ENCODER

TK1163 ORDER BY DESC

0KB01 ORDER BY DESC

TK1163 ORDER BY DESC

OKB05 334952100

PANEL,FRONT:CSA803C

A11

Figure10Ć2:ăFront Panel

CSA 803C Service Manual

10Ć9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

Fig. &

Index

No.

Tektronix

Part No.

Serial No.

Mfr.

Effective Dscont Qty 12345 Name & Description

Code

Mfr. Part No.

CHASSIS, REAR

10-3-1 200-3690-01

COVER,HIGH VOLT:ALUMINUM

80009

0KB01

200369001

ORDER BY DESC

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

211-0722-00

407-3438-02

351-0746-00

211-0718-00

351-0746-00

671-0013-00

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL

BRACKET,CHASSIS:ALUMINUM

TK1943 ORDER BY DESC

GUIDE,CKT BOARD:NYLON 6.803 L

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.312,FLH,STL

GUIDE,CKT BOARD:NYLON 6.803 L

0JR05

0KB01

0JR05

80009

ORDER BY DESC

671001300

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:REAR PANEL

(SEE A12, EXCHANGE ITEM)

-8

211-0721-00

129-1085-00

211-0410-00

214-2476-01

214-3106-00

211-0411-00

386-5369-03

255-0334-00

211-0711-00

386-5269-02

386-5283-00

343-0081-00

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.375,PNH,STL

SPACER,POST:0.25 L,4-40,BRS,0.25 HEX

SCR,ASSEMWSHR:4-40 X 0.437,PNH,STL,T10

HDW ASSY KIT:BAIL LOCK,ELEC CONN RCPT

HARDWARE KIT:JACK SOCKET

0KB01

ORDER BY DESC

-9

TK0588 129-1085-00

-10

-11

-12

-13

-14

-15

-16

-17

-18

-19

-20

93907

53387

93907

829-07510-024

3475-4

3341-1S

SCR,ASSEMWSHR:4-40 X 0.5,PNH,STL,T10

PLATE,CONNECTOR:STD,ALUMINUM

ORDER BY DESC

TK1465 386-5369-03

PLASTIC CHANNEL:12.75 X 0.175 X 0.155,NYLON 11897

122-NN-2500-060

ORDER BY DESC

SCR,ASSEMWSHR:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL,T15

SUBPANEL,REAR:PLATED

0KB01

TK1916 ORDER BY DESC

SUPPORT,CHASSIS:POWER SUPPLY,POLYCARB

STRAP,RETAINING:0.125 DIA,NYLON

0JR05

85480

0KB01

ORDER BY DESC

CPNY-172BK

210-0007-00

174-1406-00

WASHER,LOCK:#8 EXT,0.02 THK,STL

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:18,AWG,6.0 L

ORDER BY DESC

TK2469 ORDER BY DESC

TK0588 214-4082-00

TK1163 ORDER BY DESC

TK1943 ORDER BY DESC

0J9P9

80009

28520

0JR05

-21

-22

-23

214-4082-00

351-0744-00

PIN,GUIDE:0.850 L,METAL

GUIDE,PLUG-IN:POLYAMIDE

610-0750-00

407-4028-00

CHASSIS ASSY:

BRACKET,SUPPORT:

ORDER BY DESC

-24

-25

-26

-27

-28

-29

-30

-31

-32

-33

-34

-35

119-4589-00

348-0532-00

348-0253-00

210-0457-00

343-0040-00

211-0720-00

346-0143-00

108-1462-00

343-0085-00

351-0765-00

386-1559-00

--------

DELAY LINE,ELEC:COAXIAL,;24NS MATCHED

GROMMET,PLASTIC:BLACK,ROUND,0.625 ID

GROMMET,PLASTIC:BLACK,OBLONG

NUT,PL,ASSEMWA:6-32 X 0.312,STL

CLAMP,COIL:

119458900

2096

ORDER BY DESC

TK0435 ORDER BY DESC

80009

0KB01

343004000

SCR,ASSEMWSHR:6-32 X 0.50,PNH,STL,T15

STRAP,TIEDOWN,E:14.5 X 0.14,PLASTIC

COIL,RF:FXD

ORDER BY DESC

TK1719 TY244M

TK1967 ORDER BY DESC

CLAMP,LOOP:0.312 DIA,NYLON

GUIDE,CKT BOARD:NYLON

06915

30010

80009

N5-01

29-0124D

386155900

SPACER,CKT BD:0.47 H,ACETAL

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CRT SOCKET;

(NOT REPL, ORDER 672-1372-XX)

-36

-37

-38

200-3708-00

670-8847-01

407-3840-00

COVER,CKT BOARD:

TK1943 ORDER BY DESC

80009 670884701

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL CONTROL

BRACKET,SUPPORT:

TK1943 ORDER BY DESC

10Ć10

Mechanical Parts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

A12

A10

Figure 10Ć3:ăChassis, Rear

CSA 803C Service Manual

10Ć11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

Fig. &

Index

No.

Tektronix

Part No.

Serial No.

Mfr.

Effective Dscont Qty 12345 Name & Description

Code

Mfr. Part No.

CIRCUIT BOARDS

10-4-1 146-0055-00

BATTERY,DRY:3.0V,1200 MAH,LITHIUM

(BT130, BT150)

61058

71400

50579

66302

80009

BR-2/3A-E2P

TR/MCR-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

159-0245-00

156-3821-00

156-2622-00

671-1129-00

FUSE,WIRE LEAD:1A,125V,FAST

(F200, F600, F602, F800)

IC,PROCESSOR:NMOS,PERIPHERAL

(U800)

SAB82258A-1N

VF4157RC CC0001

671112900

IC,ASIC:HMOS,SEMI CUSTOM,STANDARD CELL

(U330)

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:MOTHER

(SEE A13, EXCHANGE ITEM)

-6

-7

211-0722-00

670-9655-01

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL

0KB01

80009

ORDER BY DESC

670965501

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:REGULATOR

(SEE A4, EXCHANGE ITEM)

-8

159-0220-00

FUSE,WIRE LEAD:3A,125V,FAST

(F430)

61857

SP5-3A

-9

211-0721-00

211-0408-00

670-9640-00

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.375,PNH,STL

0KB01

93907

80009

ORDER BY DESC

829-06815-024

670964000

-10

-11

SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.250,PNH,STL,T10

CIRCUIT BOARD:M/F POWER CONNECT

(SEE A3, EXCHANGE ITEM)

-12

-13

211-0711-00

670-9365-06

SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL,T15

0KB01

80009

ORDER BY DESC

670936506

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:M/F STROBE DRIVER

(SEE A1, EXCHANGE ITEM)

-14

672-0383-00

672-0384-00

CKT BD ASSY:TIMEBASE CONT W/PRESCALER

(SEE A5, EXCHANGE ITEM)

CKT BD ASSY:TIMEBASE CONT W/O PRESCALER 80009

(SEE A5 OPTION 10, EXCHANGE ITEM)

80009

672038300

672038400

-15

-16

-17

671-4471-00

672-1372-01

159-0235-00

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CALIBRATOR

(SEE A6, EXCHANGE ITEM)

80009

71400

671447100

672137201

TR/MCR 3/4

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CRT DRIVER

(SEE A8, EXCHANGE ITEM)

FUSE,WIRE LEAD:0.75A,125V,FAST

(F330)

-18

-19

-20

407-3824-00

213-0992-00

671-1023-02

BRACKET,SUPPORT:HV XFMR,0.062 ALUMINUM

SCREW,TPG,TF:4-24 X 0.375,PNH,STL

5Y400

93907

ORDER BY DESC

B80-70000-003

671102302

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:MEMORY MANAGEMENT UNIT 80009

(SEE A15, EXCHANGE ITEM)

-21

-22

-23

670-8854-04

671-1890-00

671-2888-00

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:INPUT/OUTPUT

(SEE A14, EXCHANGE ITEM)

80009

670885404

671189000

671288800

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:MEMORY

(SEE A18, EXCHANGE ITEM)

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:EXECUTIVE PROCESSOR

(SEE A17, EXCHANGE ITEM)

10Ć12

Mechanical Parts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

A13

A17

A18

A14

A15

Figure 10Ć4:ăCircuit Boards

CSA 803C Service Manual

10Ć13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

Fig. &

Index

No.

Tektronix

Part No.

Serial No.

Mfr.

Effective Dscont Qty 12345 Name & Description

Code

Mfr. Part No.

WIRE ASSEMBLIES

(SEE MAINT SECTION FOR CABLING DIAGRAM)

174-0562-00

174-0563-00

174-0576-00

174-0577-00

174-0580-00

174-0609-00

174-0616-00

174-3076-00

174-0623-00

174-0624-00

174-0625-00

174-1565-00

174-0827-00

174-1557-00

174-1559-00

174-1560-00

174-1561-00

174-1743-00

174-1744-00

174-3781-00

174-2031-00

175-1726-00

175-9814-00

175-9857-00

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:10,18 AWG,9.0 L

(FROMA4J66 TO A2A2J66)

TK1967 ORDER BY DESC

TK1547 ORDER BY DESC

TK2469 ORDER BY DESC

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:8,18 AWG,8.0 L

(FROMA4J64 TO A2A2J64)

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:50,28 AWG,10.3 L,RIBBON

(FROMA26J10 TO A1J10)

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:16,28 AWG,7.5 L,RIBBON

(FROMA19J34 TO A1J34)

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:50,28 AWG,14.0 L,RIBBON

(FROMA18J83 TO A5J83)

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHMCOAX,11.0 L,9-0-5

(FROMA1J35 TO A5J35)

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHMCOAX,30.0 L,9-8

(FROMA1J28 TO FRONT PANEL J28)

CA ASSY,RF:COAXIAL,RFD,50 OHM,0.10 D,6.5 L

(FROMA5J32 TO A19J32)

80009

174307600

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHMCOAX,6.0 L,9-0

(FROMA19J30A TO A5J30B)

TK2469 ORDER BY DESC

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHMCOAX,6.0 L,9-N

(FROMA19J29A TO A5J29B)

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHMCOAX,17.5 L,9-3

(FROMA19J33B TO A1J33B)

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHMCOAX,30.0 L,9-7

(FROMA1J27 TO A6J27)

80009

174156500

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHMCOAX,17.5 L,9-03

(FROMA1J33A TO A19J33A)

TK2469 ORDER BY DESC

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:8,22 AWG,(4)12.5 L,(4)11.125 L TK1967 ORDER BY DESC

(FROMA10J74 TO ENCODERS S74 AND S75)

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:8,26 AWG,12.0 L

(FROMA7J56 TO A8J56)

TK1967 ORDER BY DESC

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:4,26 AWG,21.0 L,RIBBON

(FROMA4J57 TO A8J57)

CA ASSY,SP:RIBBON,;CPR,3,26 AWG,9.0 L

(FROMA8J52 TO A15J52)

CA ASSY,PWR:DESCRETE,;PSC,4,18 AWG,18.5 L TK1967 ORDER BY DESC

(FROMA2A2J63 TO A13J63A)

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:50,28 AWG

(FROMA10J72 TO A14J72)

TK1547 ORDER BY DESC

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHMCOAX,8.76 L,SEMIĆRIGID TK2338 174-3781-00

(FROMA5J88 TO FRONT PANEL J88)

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHMCOAX,6.5 L,W/BLUE JKT TK2338 174-2031-00

(FROMA5J87 TO FRONT PANEL J87)

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:50,28 AWG,3.0 L

(FROMA5J18 TO A1J18)

TK1547 ORDER BY DESC

TK1967 ORDER BY DESC

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:34,3.0 L

(FROMA14J77 TO A17J77)

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:11,18 AWG,7.25 L,RIBBON

(FROMA4J62 TO A2A2J62)

10Ć14

Mechanical Parts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

Fig. &

Index

No.

Tektronix

Part No.

Serial No.

Mfr.

Effective Dscont Qty 12345 Name & Description

Code

Mfr. Part No.

ACQUISITION MODULE

657-0089-00

MODULAR ASSY:ACQUISITIONMODULE

(EXCHANGE ITEM)

80009

657008900

670936405

670936301

10-5-1 670-9364-05

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ACQUISITIONANALOG

(SEE A27, EXCHANGE ITEM)

-2

670-9363-01

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ACQUISITIONMPU

(SEE A28, EXCHANGE ITEM)

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

426-2167-00

351-0784-00

211-0392-00

426-2168-00

131-1247-00

213-0904-00

351-0761-00

386-5535-00

671-2909-00

FRAME SECT,CAB.:MODULE

TK1465 426-2167-00

GUIDE,CKT BD:UPPER,PP,7.0 L

SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25,FLH,STL,T-8

FRAME SECT,CAB.:MODULE

TK1905 ORDER BY DESC

93907

ORDER BY DESC

TK1465 426-2168-00

TERM,QIK DISC.:0.187 X 0.02 BLADE,45 DEG

SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.5,PNH,STL

GUIDE,CKT BD:PLASTIC,2.5 L

00779

83385

18677

61664-1

ORDER BY DESC

11633-1

PLATE,REAR:ALUMINUM

TK1943 ORDER BY DESC

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:STROBE TDR BUFFER

(SEE A19, EXCHANGE ITEM)

80009

671290900

-12

-13

211-0409-00

670-9361-00

SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.312,PNH,STL,T10

93907

80009

829-06888-024

670936100

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:M/F ACQUISITIONINTCON

(SEE A26, EXCHANGE ITEM)

-14

407-3562-00

BRACKET,CKT BD:MODULE

DISCONNECT,ALUMINUM

TK1943 ORDER BY DESC

-15

-16

-17

-18

-19

-20

-21

426-2166-00

386-5687-00

211-0718-00

381-0452-00

426-2165-00

384-1756-00

670-9366-02

FRAME SECT,CAB.:MODULE

SUPPORT,CKT BD:PLASTIC

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.312,FLH,STL

BAR,LOCKING MDL:

80009

426216600

TK1163 ORDER BY DESC

0KB01

5Y400

ORDER BY DESC

FRAME SECT,CAB.:MODULE

ROD,LOCKING:0.25,SST

TK1465 426-2165-00

TK0588 384-1756-00

CIRCUIT BD ASSY:HEAD INTERCONNECT

(SEE A20,A21,A22,A23, EXCHANGE ITEMS)

80009

670936602

-22

-23

-24

-25

-26

-27

-28

-29

210-0458-00

136-0864-00

211-0372-00

348-0235-00

355-0259-00

333-3815-00

351-0786-00

386-5475-00

NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:8-32 X 0.344,STL

SOCKET,PGA::PCB,;114 POS,13 X 13,0.1 CTR

SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.312,PNH,STL

SHLD GSKT,ELEK:FINGER TYPE,4.734 L

STUD,LOCKING:0.850 X 0.188 HEX,SST

PANEL,FRONT:

0KB01

23730

93907

210-0458-00

MP11411211DL

B80-00020-003

TK1465 348-0235-00

TK0588 ORDER BY DESC

0KB05

333-3815-00

GUIDE,PLUG-IN:PC,3.167 L

TK1302 ORDER BY DESC

TK1943 386-5475-00

SUBPANEL,FRONT:7.94 X 4.988,AL

CSA 803C Service Manual

10Ć15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

A28

A27

A20

A21

A22

A23

A19

A26

Figure 10Ć5:ăAcquisition Module

10Ć16

Mechanical PartsList

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

Fig. &

Index

No.

Tektronix

Part No.

Serial No.

Mfr.

Effective Dscont Qty 12345 Name & Description

Code

Mfr. Part No.

WIRE ASSEMBLIES

(SEE MAINT SECTION FOR CABLING DIAGRAM)

174-0626-01

174-0627-01

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,16.5 L,9-6

(FROM A19J1C TO A20J1C)

(FROM A19J2C TO A21J2C)

(FROM A19J3C TO A22J3C)

(FROM A19J4C TO A23J4C)

TK2338 174-0626-01

TK2338 174-0627-01

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,15.0 L,9-5

(FROM A19J1A TO A20J1A)

(FROM A19J2A TO A21J2A)

(FROM A19J3A TO A22J3A)

(FROM A19J4A TO A23J4A)

174-0630-01

174-0631-01

343-0549-00

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,8.2 L,9-3

(FROM A19J3B TO A22J3B)

TK2338 174-0630-01

TK2338 174-0631-01

TK1499 HW-047

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,5.8 L,9-4

(FROM A19J4B TO A23J4B)

STRAP,TIEDOWN,E:0.098 W X 4.0 L,ZYTEL

CSA 803C Service Manual

10Ć17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

Fig. &

Index

No.

Tektronix

Part No.

Serial No.

Mfr.

Effective Dscont Qty 12345 Name & Description

Code

Mfr. Part No.

POWER SUPPLY

10-6-1 620-0022-09

POWER SUPPLY:

(SEE A2, EXCHANGE ITEM)

80009

620002209

-2

-3

-4

-5

200-2222-00

211-0744-00

200-2264-00

159-0013-00

GUARD,FAN:

TK2105 08213

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 2.0,PNH,TORX,STL

CAP,FUSEHOLDER:3AG FUSES

TK0435 ORDER BY DESC

S3629

75915

FEK 031 1666

312006

FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,6A,250V,FAST BLOW

(F99, USED INFUSE HOLDER)

159-0021-00

159-0248-00

159-0220-00

FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,2A,250V,FAST BLOW

(F410, PART OF LINE INVERTER BOARD)

FUSE,WIRE LEAD:1.5 A

(F650, PART OF LINE INVERTER BOARD)

FUSE,WIRE LEAD:3A,125V,FAST

(F740, PART OF CONTROL RECTIFIER BOARD)

71400

61857

AGC-2

TR/MCR-1 1/2

SP5-3A

-6

-7

-8

-9

407-3362-00

204-0832-00

119-1725-01

211-0722-00

BRACKET,FAN:0.050 5005 H-34

5Y400

S3629

ORDER BY DESC

031 1673

BODY,FUSEHOLDER:3AG & 5 X 20MM FUSES

FAN,TUBEAXIAL:8 14.5VDC,6W,3200RPM,106CFM 2W944 4112 KX

SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL

0KB01

ORDER BY DESC

Figure 10Ć6:ăPower Supply

10Ć18

Mechanical Parts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

Fig. &

Index

No.

Tektronix

Part No.

Serial No.

Mfr.

Effective Dscont Qty 12345 Name & Description

Code

Mfr. Part No.

STANDARD ACCESSORIES

10-7-1 161-0066-00

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18AWG,98 L

0B445

S3109

ECM-161-0066-00

12-H05VVF3G 00

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

161-0154-00

161-0066-12

161-0066-11

161-0066-10

161-0066-09

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,1.00MM SQ,250V,10A,2.5M

(OPTION A5 ONLY)

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18 AWG,98 L

(OPTION A4 ONLY)

29870

S3109

ORDER BY DESC

198-000

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,1.00MM SQ,250V,10A,2.5M

(OPTION A3 ONLY)

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,0.1MM SQ,250VOLT,2.5 M

(OPTION A2 ONLY)

BS/13-H05VVF3G0

86511000

CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,0.75MM SQ,220V,99.0 L

(OPTION A1 ONLY)

174-1120-00

174-1364-00

006-3415-04

070-9970-00

070-9973-00

070-9974-00

CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHMCOAX,8.5 L

CABLE ASSY,RF:12.0 L,0-N

TK2469 ORDER BY DESC

TK0623 400 1829

STRAP,WRIST:3MTYPE 2214,ADJUSTABLE,6 FT

MANUAL,TECH:PROGRAMMER,11801C/CSA803C 80009

070997000

070997300

070997400

MANUAL,TECH:USER,CSA803C

80009

MANUAL,TECH:SERVICE,CSA803C

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

012-0555-00

012-0911-00

012-0991-00

012-0991-01

012-1220-00

012-1221-00

200-3395-00

CABLE,INTCON:CENTRONIX,3 METERS LON

CABLE,INTCON:MOLDED,RS232;10 FT

TK1416 DKIT-0034HCZZ

TK2435 ORDER BY DESC

CABLE,COMPOSITE:IDC,GPIB:2 METER,24 COND 00779

553577-3

553577-2

CABLE,GPIB:LOW EMI,1 METER

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:1 METER LONG

CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:2 METER LONG

COV,SMPLG HEAD:SNAP-IN

00779

TK2469 ORDER BY DESC

TK1163 ORDER BY DESC

CSA 803C Service Manual

10Ć19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replaceable Parts

Figure 10Ć7:ăAccessories

10Ć20

Mechanical Parts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tiger Games Droid Fighter User Manual
Toshiba Air Conditioner RAV SM2242DT E User Manual
Tricity Bendix Freezer UF400 User Manual
Tricity Bendix Oven BD 921 User Manual
Troy Bilt Lawn Mower LTX 1842 User Manual
TROY Group All in One Printer 2055dn User Manual
Vivitar Flash Memory VIV DF 186 User Manual
Vizio Flat Panel Television E320A0 User Manual
Vulcan Hart Electric Steamer F 32561 User Manual
Waterford Precision Cycles Ventilation Hood Stainless Steel Box Hood User Manual